Page 1 Open Source Software Table of Contents SIPROTEC 5 Introduction High-Voltage Bay Basic Structure of the Function Controller System Functions 6MD85/86 Applications V7.50 and higher Function-Group Types Control Functions Manual Protection and Automation Functions Supervision Functions Measured Values, Energy Values, and...
Page 2 Although including rights created by patent grant or registration of a Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document as utility model or a design, are reserved. precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall not...
Page 3: Preface
Preface Purpose of the Manual This manual describes the functions of SIPROTEC 5 high voltage bay controllers. Target Audience Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main- tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa- tions and power plants.
Page 4 The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5. • Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices, and a device selection table. Indication of Conformity...
Page 5 Preface Additional Support For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner. Support Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service. Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000 Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471 E-Mail: [email protected] Training Courses Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:...
Page 6 The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by Siemens. Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following: •...
Page 7: Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your Siemens sales contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years since purchase of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product.
Page 8 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 9: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Preface................................3 Open Source Software..........................7 Introduction..............................31 General..........................32 Properties of SIPROTEC 5....................34 Basic Structure of the Function........................35 Function Embedding in the Device..................36 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope............. 38 Function Control....................... 40 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications........44 Information Lists.......................
Page 10 Table of Contents 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts..........83 3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions......87 Fault Recording.........................91 3.4.1 Overview of Functions ....................91 3.4.2 Structure of the Function..................... 91 3.4.3 Function Description....................91 3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes..................94 3.4.5...
Page 11 Security Settings in the Device..................171 3.11.1 Multi-Level Safety Concept..................171 Applications.............................. 173 Overview........................174 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD85........175 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86........178 Function-Group Types..........................181 Power-System Data......................182 5.1.1 Overview........................182 5.1.2...
Page 12 Table of Contents 5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group................206 5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes..................207 5.4.4 Settings........................207 5.4.5 Information List......................208 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole..............209 5.5.1 Overview........................209 5.5.2 Structure of the Function Group................210 5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes..................211 5.5.4 Settings........................212 5.5.5...
Page 13 Table of Contents 5.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes................247 5.6.7.3 Settings....................... 248 5.6.7.4 Information List....................248 5.6.8 Settings........................249 5.6.9 Information List......................250 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................. 253 5.7.1 Overview........................253 5.7.2 Structure of the Function Group................253 5.7.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................255 5.7.3.1 Overview ......................
Page 14 Table of Contents 5.8.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ..........294 5.8.5 Settings........................295 5.8.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object............295 5.8.7 Closure Detection...................... 295 5.8.8 Information List......................296 5.8.9 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) ..............297 5.8.10 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) ........298 5.8.11 Settings........................299 5.8.12...
Page 15 Table of Contents 6.4.7 Stage Synchrocheck....................377 6.4.7.1 Description......................377 6.4.7.2 Application and Setting Notes................378 6.4.7.3 Settings....................... 378 6.4.7.4 Information List....................379 6.4.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous................380 6.4.8.1 Description......................380 6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes................384 6.4.8.3 Settings....................... 386 6.4.8.4 Information List....................387 6.4.9 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous with Balancing Commands........
Page 16 Table of Contents 6.8.4 Settings........................448 6.8.5 Information List......................448 Voltage Controller......................450 6.9.1 Overview of Functions....................450 6.9.2 Structure of the Function................... 450 6.9.3 Function Description....................451 6.9.3.1 General........................451 6.9.3.2 Logic of the Function................... 458 6.9.3.3 Control Response....................459 6.9.3.4 Function Supervision....................462 6.9.3.5 Line Compensation....................
Page 17 Table of Contents 7.2.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command ............... 566 7.2.4.15 Reclaim Time....................... 568 7.2.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition ........569 7.2.4.17 Blockings......................571 7.2.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)........574 7.2.4.19 Settings....................... 576 7.2.4.20 Information List....................
Page 18 Table of Contents Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................634 7.5.1 Overview of Functions....................634 7.5.2 Structure of the Function................... 634 7.5.3 General Functionality....................635 7.5.3.1 Description......................635 7.5.3.2 Application and Setting Notes ................636 7.5.3.3 Settings....................... 637 7.5.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............638 7.5.4.1 Description ......................
Page 19 Table of Contents 7.6.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection ........... 698 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground..............700 7.7.1 Overview of Functions....................700 7.7.2 Structure of the Function................... 700 7.7.3 General Functionality....................702 7.7.3.1 Measured-Value Selection..................702 7.7.3.2 Direction Determination..................703 7.7.3.3 Application and Setting Notes................
Page 20 Table of Contents 7.8.5 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............. 755 7.8.5.1 Description ......................755 7.8.5.2 Application and Setting Notes ................756 7.8.5.3 Settings....................... 757 7.8.5.4 Information List....................758 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions............ 759 7.9.1 Description ....................... 759 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection....................760 7.10.1 Overview of Functions....................
Page 21 Table of Contents 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage........... 795 7.14.1 Overview of Functions....................795 7.14.2 Structure of the Function................... 795 7.14.3 Stage Description ......................796 7.14.4 Application and Setting Notes..................796 7.14.5 Settings........................797 7.14.6 Information List......................797 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage.................799 7.15.1 Overview of Functions....................
Page 22 Table of Contents 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding..................834 7.20.1 Overview of Functions....................834 7.20.2 Structure of the Function................... 834 7.20.3 General Functionality....................835 7.20.3.1 Description......................835 7.20.3.2 Application and Setting Notes................838 7.20.4 Stage Description...................... 841 7.20.4.1 Description......................841 7.20.4.2 Application and Setting Notes................
Page 23 Table of Contents 7.25.2 Structure of the Function ..................871 7.25.3 Stage Description ......................872 7.25.4 Application and Setting Notes ................... 873 7.25.5 Settings........................873 7.25.6 Information List......................874 7.25.7 Description........................ 875 7.25.8 Application and Settings Notes.................. 876 7.25.9 Settings........................877 7.25.10 Information List......................877 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced............
Page 24 Table of Contents 7.29.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode: Light and Current...................... 922 7.29.9.1 Description......................922 7.29.9.2 Application and Setting Notes................924 7.29.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation..924 7.29.10.1 Description......................
Page 25 Table of Contents 8.3.7 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision................957 8.3.7.1 Overview of Functions ..................957 8.3.7.2 Structure of the Function ..................957 8.3.7.3 Function Description.................... 958 8.3.7.4 Application and Setting Notes ................959 8.3.7.5 Settings....................... 959 8.3.7.6 Information List....................959 8.3.8 Current-Balance Supervision..................959 8.3.8.1 Overview of Functions ..................959 8.3.8.2...
Page 26 Table of Contents Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System..........993 Overview of Functions....................994 Structure of the Function....................995 Operational Measured Values..................997 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components..............999 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)...................1000 9.5.1 Overview of Functions..................... 1000 9.5.2 Structure of the Function Group................
Page 27 Table of Contents Energy Values....................... 1042 9.9.1 Function Description of Energy Values..............1042 9.9.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values............1043 9.10 User-Defined Metered Values..................1045 9.10.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values............1045 9.10.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values........... 1046 9.11 Statistic Values......................1049 9.11.1...
Page 28 Table of Contents 11.7 External Trip Initiation ....................1110 11.8 Overcurrent Protection, Phases..................1111 11.8.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............1111 11.8.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............1113 11.8.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve ............1120 11.9 Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................1123 11.9.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ............
Page 29 Appendix..............................1205 Order Configurator and Order Options................1206 Ordering Accessories.....................1207 Typographic and Symbol Conventions................1209 Standard Variants for 6MD85 ..................1212 Standard Variants for 6MD86 ..................1217 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............. 1223 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices....... 1231 Connection Examples for Special Applications ...............1237...
Page 30 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 31: Introduction
Introduction General Properties of SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 32: General
Introduction 1.1 General General The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with a powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the circuit breaker, are processed digitally. Analog Inputs The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt them to the internal processing level of the device.
Page 33 Introduction 1.1 General Power Supply The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data). SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 34: Properties Of Siprotec 5
Introduction 1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-voltage switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions. General Properties •...
Page 35: Basic Structure Of The Function
Basic Structure of the Function Function Embedding in the Device Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope Function Control Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications Information Lists SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 36: Function Embedding In The Device
Basic Structure of the Function 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device Function Embedding in the Device General SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The necessary integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
Page 37 Basic Structure of the Function 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function group. The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available measuring points of the device.
Page 38: Adjustment Of Application Templates/Functional Scope
• Function settings Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope. Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func- tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also copied when you copy functionalities.
Page 39 Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com. • Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading. • Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help of DIGSI 5.
Page 40: Function Control
Basic Structure of the Function 2.3 Function Control Function Control Function control is used for: • Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks • Stages within functions • Function blocks within functions NOTE Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies to tripping stage control and function block control.
Page 41 Basic Structure of the Function 2.3 Function Control The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state is shown in the following table. Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Linkage of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State) Inputs State of the Function Parameter Mode (of the function)
Page 42 Basic Structure of the Function 2.3 Function Control Function State Explanation Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor- mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with a test bit.
Page 43 Basic Structure of the Function 2.3 Function Control Not Active The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is active in the following cases: • Function is disabled • The function is in the health state Alarm •...
Page 44: Text Structure And Reference Number For Settings And Indications
Basic Structure of the Function 2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the device and the corresponding description in the manual.
Page 45: Information Lists
Basic Structure of the Function 2.5 Information Lists Information Lists For the function groups, functions, and function blocks, settings and miscellaneous signals are defined that are shown in the settings and information lists. The information lists summarize the signals. The data type of the information may differ. Possible data types are ENS, ACD, ACT, SPS and MV, etc.
Page 46 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 47: System Functions
System Functions Indications Measured-Value Acquisition Processing Quality Attributes Fault Recording Protection Communication Date and Time Synchronization User-Defined Objects Other Functions General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 3.10 Device Settings 3.11 Security Settings in the Device SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 48: Indications
System Functions 3.1 Indications Indications General 3.1.1 During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include: • Measured data • Power-system data • Device supervisions • Device functions • Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Page 49 System Functions 3.1 Indications Figure 3-1 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications) Menu Path Main menu → Indications → Operational log Fault log Ground-fault log Setting changes User indications 1 User indications 2 Motor-starting indications Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Device diagnosis Security indications Communication indications...
Page 50: Reading Indications From The Pc With Digsi 5
System Functions 3.1 Indications Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5 3.1.3 Procedure Menu Path (Project) Project → Device → Process data → Log → Operational log Setting changes Fault log User indications 1 User indications 2 Motor-starting log Ground-fault log Online access →...
Page 51: Displaying Indications
System Functions 3.1 Indications Setting Relative Time Reference Reference the display of log entries, if needed, to the real time of a specific entry. In this way, you deter- ² mine a relative time for all other indications. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected. Displaying Indications 3.1.4 Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-...
Page 52 System Functions 3.1 Indications Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information Log for parameter changes Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time), Relative time, Function structure, Entry number, Name, Function structure, Value Name, Value, Quality, Cause, Number Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time),...
Page 53: Logs
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by Siemens. Indication Message text Function Structure Path of the signal with the signal name...
Page 54 System Functions 3.1 Indications Logging Setting-history log Setting changes User-defined log User-defined indication scope Security log Access with safety relevance Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits Communication log Status of communication interfaces Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup Management of Logs Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed.
Page 55: Operational Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are described separately (see following chapter about logs). 3.1.5.2 Operational Log Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information about: •...
Page 56: Fault Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications Reading on the Device via the On-Site Operation Panel • To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel. Main Menu → Indications → Operational log • You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site operation panel.
Page 57: Ground-Fault Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications NOTE The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off. Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the last fault on the device display is also done.
Page 58 System Functions 3.1 Indications The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication: • Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns) • Sensitive ground current protection with I0 (50Ns/51Ns) • Intermittent ground-fault protection The logging ends with the going ground-fault indication.
Page 59: Setting-History Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications Figure 3-8 Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device Deletability The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Page 60 System Functions 3.1 Indications [scparamd-030211-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-9 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5 Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel • To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Page 61: User Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications Displayed Information Explanation DCF loaded DCF loaded into device SG 1 Settings group 1 SG 2 Settings group 2 SG 3 Settings group 3 SG 4 Settings group 4 SG 5 Settings group 5 SG 6 Settings group 6 SG 7 Settings group 7...
Page 62 System Functions 3.1 Indications [scuserrlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-12 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device Deletability The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Page 63: Security Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications 3.1.5.7 Security Log Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log. Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 •...
Page 64: Device-Diagnosis Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications NOTE • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed! • This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user! • If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly read this log.
Page 65: Communication Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications Figure 3-17 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device NOTE • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted! • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed! 3.1.5.9 Communication Log The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces.
Page 66: Motor-Starting Log
System Functions 3.1 Indications Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel • To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation panel. Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Communication log •...
Page 67 System Functions 3.1 Indications • To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-20 a)). [scmotmlp-160713-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-20 Reading the Motor-Starting Log with DIGSI 5 Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel •...
Page 68: Saving And Deleting The Logs
System Functions 3.1 Indications Configurability The motor-starting log is only present in the Motor function group. There is no column for the motor-starting log in the DIGSI information routing. The entries in the motor-starting log are preconfigured and cannot be changed.
Page 69: Spontaneous Indication Display In Digsi 5
System Functions 3.1 Indications Figure 3-22 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel • You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site operation panel. • The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts.
Page 70: Spontaneous Fault Display On The On-Site Operation Panel
System Functions 3.1 Indications [scspnmld-230211-01, 2, en_US] Figure 3-23 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel 3.1.8 After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display without further operational measures.
Page 71: Stored Indications In The Siprotec 5 Device
System Functions 3.1 Indications Displayed Information Explanation Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance. Acknowledgement of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker is configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed.
Page 72: Resetting Stored Indications Of The Function Group
System Functions 3.1 Indications You are offered the following options: Table 3-8 Overview of Routing Options Routing Options LEDs Description (active) The signal is routed as active with voltage. (active) The signal is routed as active without voltage. (unlatched) The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset of the output (LED, BA) occurs automatically via the binary- signal value.
Page 73: Measured-Value Acquisition
System Functions 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition Measured-Value Acquisition Basic Principle SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu- racy across a wide dynamic range.
Page 74 System Functions 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2 variants: • Fixed (not resampled) • Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz) Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement.
Page 75: Processing Quality Attributes
System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Processing Quality Attributes Overview 3.3.1 The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli- cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects on the basis of these quality attributes.
Page 76 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes • OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE , FALSE The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message origi- nates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched off, the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state.
Page 77: Quality Processing/Affected By The User For Received Goose Values
System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Influencing the Quality by the User You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the following 3 locations: • In the Information routing editor for external signals of GOOSE connections •...
Page 78 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes [sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 1, en_US] Figure 3-28 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
Page 79 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes [sc_LB_GOOSE_1, 1, en_US] Figure 3-29 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver. For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
Page 80 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes [sc_LB_GOOSE_3, 1, en_US] Figure 3-30 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box. Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device.
Page 81 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Data Substitute Values Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used. Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True) (The directional information is always manually updated with unknown .
Page 82 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes [sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US] Figure 3-31 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object The setting options work for the device receiving the data. Quality Attribute: Validity The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value. •...
Page 83: Quality Processing/Affected By The User In Cfc Charts
System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is OperatorBlocked = forwarded. TRUE If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of validity = invalid is set, the respective data object substitute value is used.
Page 84 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Quality Attribute: Validity If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set glob- ally.
Page 85 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Building Blocks Description OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic. The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the AND_SPS value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
Page 86 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Building Blocks Description BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally used as a CFC output. BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks. BUILD_BSC BUILD_DPS BUILD_ENS...
Page 87: Quality Processing/Affected By The User In Internal Device Functions
System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way, you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
Page 88 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type) Figure 3-35 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source, different quality attributes can be set: • CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts •...
Page 89 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes [sceinflu de, 1, en_US] Figure 3-36 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal) Quality Attribute: Validity The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid ).
Page 90 System Functions 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes Quality Attribute: Test The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select and the function to be processed is in between the following options: •...
Page 91: Fault Recording
System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording Fault Recording Overview of Functions 3.4.1 All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording docu- ments operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them. You can read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA.
Page 92 System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording [dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-37 Example of a Fault Recording With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording. You can set the following values: • with pickup: The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into account.
Page 93 System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded All analog inputs of the device that have been configured (currents and voltages) are recorded as sampled channels. Function-specific binary signals (for example, pickup and trip signals) and measured value channels can be configured individually for recording in the DIGSI information-routing matrix.
Page 94: Application And Setting Notes
System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording Name Type Description Control: Delete memory Delete all recording via the function key. The error numbers remain as is. Control: >External start Start recording by an external binary signal, for example, by the trip command of an external protection device.
Page 95 System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording Parameter Value Description If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the with trip record time, any fault recording that has been started will be saved. Parameter: Maximum record time • Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual fault recording.
Page 96: Settings
System Functions 3.4 Fault Recording Parameter: Scaling COMTRADE • Recommended setting value Scaling COMTRADE = Secondary values With the Scaling COMTRADE parameter, you scale the fault record data for the COMTRADE format. Possible setting values are Primary values or Secondary values. Settings 3.4.5 Addr.
Page 97: Protection Communication
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Protection Communication Overview 3.5.1 Protection communication includes all functionalities required to exchange data via the protection interface (PI). It manages one or a maximum of 2 protection interfaces. The Protection communication is generated with the configuration of the channels as a protocol. You can find detailed information in the section Protection interface in chapter 3.5.2.1 Overview of Func- tions.
Page 98: Function Description
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwstruct-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-38 Structure of the Protection Interface in a Device The protection communication runs physically via a serial optical communication module. This module can have 1 or 2 channels. The protection communication can take place via various modules. This depends on the type of interface and the application.
Page 99 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwintert-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-39 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communications of Type 1 or Type 2 in a Protection Topology 2-Device Topology: Simple or Redundant Transfer In the case of a simple 2-device topology, one protection communication per device is required (see next figure).
Page 100 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwintera-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-41 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Communications/Redundant Transmis- sion Route Multi-Device Topology: Ring or Chain Topology When there are more than 2 devices, a communication chain or a communication ring can be established. An arrangement with a maximum of 6 devices is possible.
Page 101 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication The communication ring has the advantage over the communication chain that the entire communications system and, for example, the differential protection function also work if one of the communication connec- tions fails or if a device in the topology is taken out of operation. You can find more information in chapter 3.5.2.5 Device-Combination Settings.
Page 102 The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers the highest transmis- sion rate of 2 MBit/s and is immune to failures in the communication route while offering the shortest trans- mission time.
Page 103 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Plug-In Modules Physical Connection 1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ● 1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber 1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●...
Page 104 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwmultim-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-44 Connection over Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber [dwmultim-070611-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-45 Connection over Maximum 4 km via Multimode Optical Fiber [dwsingle-070611-03.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-46 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber NOTE...
Page 105 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwsingle-020513-04.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-47 Connection via Singlemode Optical Fiber [dwmultim-070611-05.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-48 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.1 Interface The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64 kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s).
Page 106 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [dwmulti7-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-50 Connection via 2-Wire Copper Cables The connection to a communication converter with an integrated 5-kV isolation voltage is established with 128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-13). A 20 kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
Page 107 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Supervision of the Communication The communication is continuously monitored by the devices. If a number of defective data telegrams, or no data telegrams at all, are received, this is regarded as a failure in the communication as soon as a failure time of 100 ms (default setting can be changed) is exceeded. A list of the measured values is shown in a window in DIGSI 5 (defective telegrams per minute/hour;...
Page 108: Initialization And Configuration Of The Protection Interface In Digsi 5
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy The measured values of the line differential protection for the various line ends are synchronized with each other with microsecond accuracy via the mechanisms of the protection interface. The protection interface displays this state with the RAISING indication Protection interface synchronized .
Page 109: Device-Combination Settings
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication • Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (see next figure). Depending on the device, the selection of constellations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices. [scconfws-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-55 Selecting the Constellation NOTE...
Page 110 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scconfig-181013-01, 2, en_US] Figure 3-56 Protection Interface Initialization and Configuration Changes in 1 channel are always visible on the other channel as well. All further parameters can be set sepa- rately for individual channels. Setting Device-Combination Settings •...
Page 111: Selecting The Connection
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication The parameters Address of device 1 to Address of device 6 can be used to give an address to each device. Set a unique and unambiguous address for each device. • Default setting (_:5131:101) Local device is device = 1 With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the topology.
Page 112: Routing Information In Digsi 5
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table). Table 3-13 Means of Communication Means of Communication Setting Value Bit Rate...
Page 113 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication dropout time, or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be configured separately for each received signal (see Table 3-17). NOTE For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted. Indications that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram.
Page 114 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Table 3-17 Possible Dropout Values Signal Type Dropout Values SP (single-point indication) Outgoing, Incoming, Hold DP (double-point indication) On, Off, Intermediate Position, Disturbed Position, Hold IN (metered values) 0, Hold MW (measured values) 0, Hold Hold NOTE If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
Page 115 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scransps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-58 Routing of Single-Point Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 1 [scrangmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-59 Routing of Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 116 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scrangzw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-60 Routing of Metered Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1 This device also receives information (in the matrix under Receive). This must have been routed as a target for other devices (see next figure).
Page 117 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scbaspsr-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-62 Routing of Single-Point Indications to be Sent to the Protection Interface in Device 2 The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from the 1st device.
Page 118: Diagnostic Measured Values Of The Protection Interface
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scbauszw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-65 Routing of Metered Values to the Protection Interface in Device 2 3.5.2.8 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection Interface The following diagnostic data is provided via the protection interfaces by the devices in the constellation: •...
Page 119 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication NOTE You can use the following procedure to reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in the device: Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values. Output Signals of the Protection Interface Each individual protection interface provides the following indications for commissioning and diagnosing communication:...
Page 120 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Indication Description The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers (_:5161:302) Status 3 and 4 (3: Network Layer, 4: Transport Layer). The following indications values of lay. 3 and 4 are possible: •...
Page 121 Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow. Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of faults.
Page 122: Diagnostic Data For The Protection Interface
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Measured Value Description Number of telegram failures within the last week (_:5161:337) Miss.tel/w Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day (_:5161:338) M. loss/d Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week (_:5161:339) M. loss/w NOTE You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device.
Page 123 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Channel Type Name Values Description - Diagnostic Information for Log PI Protection interfaces - log Build Date/time Date and time of the log version Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log in DIGSI 5 The following figures and tables describe the displays of the protection-interface log. [scdiamed-140912-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-68 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - Media Status...
Page 124 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication [scdiacom-140912-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-69 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer) Table 3-20 Description of Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer) Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - HDLC Link...
Page 125 Sending telegrams, low frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty HDLC Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special diagnostic for fault search [scdiahdl-140912-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-70 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface Between Module and Mainboard) SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 126: Settings
Sending telegrams, low frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty COM interface Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special diagnostic for fault search Table 3-22 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface Protection Interfaces - Log Name...
Page 127: Information List
System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:5131:106 Device combin.:Address of 1 to 65534 device 5 _:5131:107 Device combin.:Address of 1 to 65534 device 6 _:5131:101 Device combin.:Local 1 to 6 device is device • _:5131:122 Device combin.:Lowest 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s...
Page 128 System Functions 3.5 Protection Communication Information Data Class Type (Type) _:5131:314 Device combin.:Device 3 available _:5131:315 Device combin.:Device 4 available _:5131:316 Device combin.:Device 5 available _:5131:317 Device combin.:Device 6 available Prot. interf.1 _:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage _:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset _:5161:341 Prot.
Page 129: Date And Time Synchronization
System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Date and Time Synchronization Overview of Functions 3.6.1 Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/ time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech- nology or transferred via the protection interface.
Page 130 System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Configurable Time Sources: • 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided. • Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails.
Page 131 System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Indication Description Device: This indication signals a high difference between the internally managed time and the time of the clock Clock fail module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi- cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz crystal.
Page 132: Application And Setting Notes
System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization [sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US] Figure 3-71 Time Information in DIGSI For every time source, you see the following: • Last received time (with date) • Receipt time of the last received time telegram • Configured type of timer •...
Page 133 System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Parameter Value Description Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone offsets to local GMT. Time format according to UTC (universal time) Parameter: Time source 1,Time source 2 • Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none With the Time source 1 and Time source 2 parameters, you can configure an external timer.
Page 134 System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Parameter Value Description The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured IEC 60870-5-103 communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
Page 135: Settings
System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Selection Button Description Manual settings (local time zone and daylight saving This setting must be selected if you want to select the time regulation) local time zone and daylight saving time zone regula- tions of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless of the PC settings.
Page 136: Information List
System Functions 3.6 Date and Time Synchronization Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:106 Time sync.:Time source port J • 2 port port F • port E • port P • port N • port G • _:107 Time sync.:Time source •...
Page 137: User-Defined Objects
System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects User-Defined Objects Overview 3.7.1 With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects, for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure). [scudef_lib, 1, en_US] Figure 3-73 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-...
Page 138: Basic Data Types
System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects Basic Data Types 3.7.2 The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User- defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.7.5 External Signals).
Page 139 System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects [scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-76 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder) Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status) When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed position).
Page 140 System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects EXAMPLE The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be shown on the display of the device. State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS) The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Page 141: Pulse- And Energy- Metered Values
System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects Pulse- and Energy- Metered Values 3.7.3 Pulse-Metered Values Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the DIGSI library under User- defined Functions. The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.10.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values Energy-Metered Values...
Page 142 System Functions 3.7 User-Defined Objects [sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US] Figure 3-77 External Signals NOTE Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 143: Other Functions
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions Other Functions Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals 3.8.1 Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
Page 144 System Functions 3.8 Other Functions example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for this.
Page 145 System Functions 3.8 Other Functions The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-81 Figure 3-82 in the exam- ples shown in the following): • No. permis.state changes This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the chatter-checking time.
Page 146 System Functions 3.8 Other Functions [dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-81 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes During 2nd Subsequent Test Time The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time. Example 2: Temporary Blocking The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows: •...
Page 147: Acquisition Blocking And Manual Updating
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions [dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US] Figure 3-82 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes During 2nd Subsequent Test Time 3.8.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical signals and binary inputs may be useful.
Page 148 System Functions 3.8 Other Functions Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu. • Select Manual update (Figure 3-84) using the navigation keys. • With the navigation keys, select the switching-device setting to be updated manually (for example, off, Figure 3-85).
Page 149: Persistent Commands
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions [scbeerfa-190215, 1, en_US] Figure 3-87 Input signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual Updating on the Switching Device NOTE Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking again manually.
Page 150: Device Logoff
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions [scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 3-88 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5 Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant. 3.8.4 Device Logoff 3.8.4.1 Overview...
Page 151: Application And Setting Notes
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions You can log off the device as follows: • Via the on-site operation panel • Via a communication interface using the Device logoff ( _:319 ) controllable • Via the binary inputs, general: >Device funct.logoff on ( _:507 ) or >Dev. funct.logoff off _:508 ) You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device→Information routing in the working area in the General block.
Page 152 System Functions 3.8 Other Functions Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol If devices are exchanging data via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol, for example, in the case of substation interlocking, you can set in the receiver device for each received data point the value of this data point when the transmitter device logs off.
Page 153: Information List
System Functions 3.8 Other Functions 3.8.4.3 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:507 General:>Device funct.logoff on _:508 General:>Dev. funct.logoff off _:319 General:Device logoff _:313 General:Logged off via BI _:314 General:Logged off via control _:315 General:Device logged off SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 154: General Notes For Setting The Threshold Value Of Protection Functions
If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views. Recommendation for Setting Sequence When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure: • First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
Page 155 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the example of the Overcurrent protection function.
Page 156 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scpwandl_3, 1, en_US] Figure 3-94 Setting Sheet: Transformer Data In the function group Voltage/current 3-phase, you set the rated current and the rated voltage (see following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the reference variables for the percent setting. [screfpro-280514_de, 1, en_US] Figure 3-95 Reference Data for Percentage Settings...
Page 157 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scumzpri_5, 1, en_US] Figure 3-96 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode: Primary) When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value: 1500 A/1000 A ·...
Page 158 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scumzpro_6, 1, en_US] Figure 3-97 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode: Percent) When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value: 1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 159 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scumzsek_7, 1, en_US] Figure 3-98 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode: Secondary) If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during the project phase.
Page 160 System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scfragew_8, 1, en_US] Figure 3-99 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary) If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the active secondary view.
Page 161: Changing The Transformation Ratios Of The Transformer On The Device
System Functions 3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions [scsekneu_9, 1, en_US] Figure 3-100 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No.
Page 162: Device Settings
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings 3.10 Device Settings Settings-Group Switching 3.10.1 3.10.1.1 Overview of Functions For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if necessary enable them quickly. You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at any given time.
Page 163: Application And Setting Notes
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings Switching via Control When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart. The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
Page 164: Settings
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings Parameter Value Description The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a via control communication connection from a substation automation technology or via a CFC chart. The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
Page 165 System Functions 3.10 Device Settings [scDeSeDe1-310715-01, 1, en_US] [scDeSeAl-310715-01, 2, en_US] [scDeSeall-260815-01, 1, en_US] Figure 3-101 General Device Settings The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information. You can find more about: • Chatter blocking in chapter 3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
Page 166: Application And Setting Notes
You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for test purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating theTest support again after the test phase. 3.10.2.2 Application and Setting Notes The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above.
Page 167: Settings
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings With the Activate device test mode parameter, you activate the test mode that adds a test bit to the output indications. If test mode is activated but the test mode of the relay outputs is not, no relay outputs are activated by the protection functions.
Page 168: Device Logoff
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings Information Data Class Type (Type) _:54 General:Protection inactive _:323 General:LED reset _:320 General:LED have been reset 3.10.3 Device Logoff 3.10.3.1 Overview In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica- tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant and even to switch it off.
Page 169: Application And Setting Notes
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings 3.10.3.2 Application and Setting Notes Logoff Options for a Device You can log off a device as follows: • Via the on-site operation panel • Via communication via the controllable Device logoff ( _:319 ) •...
Page 170: Information List
System Functions 3.10 Device Settings [loextta logoff device, 1, en_US] Figure 3-103 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Device funct.logoff on as H (active with voltage) and the binary input >Dev.
Page 171: Security Settings In The Device
System Functions 3.11 Security Settings in the Device 3.11 Security Settings in the Device Multi-Level Safety Concept 3.11.1 DIGSI 5 offers many useful functions for the configuration and testing of your SIPROTEC 5 devices. Constant password prompts are not sensible during this phase. During operation, however, the focus is on the reading of data.
Page 172 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 173: Applications
Applications Overview Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD85 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 174: Overview
• Check the logic block chart for the group warning indication The following describes the application templates for 6MD85 and 6MD86 devices. NOTE The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-...
Page 175: Application Templates And Functional Scope For Device 6Md85
The application templates contain: • Basic configurations • Required functions • Default settings The following application templates are available for the device 6MD85 in the DIGSI 5 function library: • Not preconfigured • Standard • Control expanded To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements...
Page 176 The unconfigured application template is available for all applications that cannot be built on other application templates or for which deletion would be too complex. Application Template: 6MD85 Standard The 6MD85 standard application template is preconfigured for the following applications: • Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 177 4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD85 Application Template: 6MD85 with Expanded Control The 6MD85 with expanded control application template is preconfigured for the following applications: • Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection (but also contains the CFC blocks for switching sequences) •...
Page 178: Application Templates And Functional Scope For Device 6Md86
Applications 4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 6MD86. The application templates contain: • Basic configurations • Required functions •...
Page 179 Applications 4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 ANSI Function Abbr. Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> system Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx> 74TC Trip-circuit supervision Automatic reclosing AREC Overfrequency protection f> Underfrequency protection f< Underfrequency Load Shedding Frequency-change protection df/dt Lockout Two-winding transformer voltage controller...
Page 180 Applications 4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 Application Template: 6MD86 Standard Double Busbar The 6MD86 standard double busbar application template is preconfigured for the following applications: • Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection • Synchrocheck for circuit breaker •...
Page 181: Function-Group Types
Function-Group Types Power-System Data Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Function-Group Type Analog Units Process Monitor Voltage Measuring-Point Selection SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 182: Power-System Data
Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Power-System Data Overview 5.1.1 The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data. Structure of the Power-System Data 5.1.2 The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device.
Page 183: Application And Setting Notes For Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3Ph)
Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph) 5.1.4 Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the description of these settings in chapter Supervision Functions. Parameter: Rated primary voltage •...
Page 184 Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data EXAMPLE 1: [dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US] Figure 5-2 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN If the connection type of the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT connec- tion ) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer (da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows: When changing the neutral point according to Figure...
Page 185 Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data [fo_bsp2, 1, en_US] Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866. Interpretation of the result: The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas- ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device: [fo_umrechnung2, 2, en_US] NOTE...
Page 186: Application And Setting Notes For Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3Ph)
If possible, only the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Note: If the parameter Tracking = active , the determined sampling frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates.
Page 187 If possible, only the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Note: If the parameter Tracking = active , the determined sampling frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates.
Page 188 Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj • Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined by the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer).
Page 189: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data has been exceeded. Either the frequency is out of range (10 Hz to 80 Hz) or the input signals are too small for a manual update. Should this condition occur, the system switches the update frequency to a sampling rate that corresponds to the rated frequency.
Page 190 Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking inactive active • active _:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 point ID CT phases _:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A current •...
Page 191: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • • • • INsens • • 50 frames / s • 60 frames / s CT 2 _:3842:103 CT 2:Magnitude correction 0.010 to 10.000 1.000 •...
Page 192 Function-Group Types 5.1 Power-System Data Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted _:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted _:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted VT 1 _:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage VT 2 _:3812:300 VT 2:Sampled val. voltage VT 3 _:3813:300 VT 3:Sampled val.
Page 193: Function-Group Type Voltage/Current 3-Phase
Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Overview 5.2.1 All functions for protection and supervision of a protected object or equipment allowing 3-phase current and voltage measurement can be used in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase. The function group also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
Page 194 Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase The function group has interfaces with • Measuring points • Circuit-breaker function group Interface with Measuring Points The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
Page 195 Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase In the detail configuration of the interface, you define: • Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command • Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function •...
Page 196 Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to dary Phase-to-phase voltages Rated operating voltage of the primary values Zero-sequence voltage Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3 Neutral-point displacement Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3 voltage Frequency Rated frequency...
Page 197: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase [loauslin-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 5-6 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group Application and Setting Notes 5.2.3 Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group With this, you define which circuit-breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection func- tion group.
Page 198: Write-Protected Settings
Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Write-Protected Settings 5.2.4 Parameter: Rated apparent power • Default setting (_:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power for the auto transformer to be protected.
Page 199 Function-Group Types 5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase Information Data Class Type (Type) Reset LED Group _:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset _:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset Closure detec. _:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open _:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 200: Function-Group Type Voltage/Current 1-Phase
Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Overview 5.3.1 In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a protected object or equipment which allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence voltage measurement via a 3-phase voltage measuring point.
Page 201 Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase [scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US] Figure 5-8 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage V at the broken-delta winding.
Page 202 Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the Voltage-current 1-phase function group depending on the connection types. Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input Phase Voltage Measuring Point 3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages and used as a voltage input for all functions.
Page 203: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Operational Measured Values The operational measured values are not preconfigured in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You can instantiate them in the function group or delete them from the function group. You can find the opera- tional measured values in the DIGSI library, in the folder FG Voltage-current 1-phase under Measurements →...
Page 204: Write-Protected Settings
Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Parameter: Rated current • Default setting (_:9421:101) Rated current = 1000 A The (_:9421:101) Rated current parameter is used to set the primary rated current of the protected object. The (_:9421:101) Rated current specified here is the reference value for the percentage-meas- ured values and setting values made in percentages.
Page 205: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Measurements • _:9421:150 General:P, Q sign not reversed not reversed • reversed Information List 5.3.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:9421:52 General:Behavior _:9421:53 General:Health Group indicat. _:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup _:4501:57...
Page 206: Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
Function-Group Types 5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase Overview 5.4.1 In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
Page 207: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function group. You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign- ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree →...
Page 208: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase Information List 5.4.5 Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:9421:52 General:Behavior _:9421:53 General:Health Group indicat. _:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup _:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate Reset LED FG _:4741:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset _:4741:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 209: Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Overview 5.5.1 The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker. You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can use for this device type.
Page 210: Structure Of The Function Group
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole The circuit breaker [status only] is used only for acquiring the circuit-breaker switch position. This type can be used to model switches that can only be read but not controlled by the SIPROTEC 5 device. The available functions are described in the chapters 7 Protection and Automation Functions 6 Control...
Page 211: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase current because this connection is essential (only for 6MD86 application templates). It can be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the function group, depending on the nature of the user functions used.
Page 212: Settings
0.05 A for example. If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary purposes.
Page 213: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Information List 5.5.5 Information Data Class Type (Type) Circuit break. _:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready _:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking _:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. _:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst _:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health _:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health _:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position _:4261:300...
Page 214: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Trip-Command Reset [lobefe3p-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-19 Trip-Command Reset Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-18). You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of trip command.
Page 215: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Parameter Value Description With this setting, the trip command is reset as soon as the current is removed, with I< provided the tripping function has dropped out. The most important factor for recognition of the open circuit breaker is the current falling short of the value set in the parameter (_:2311:112) Current thresh.
Page 216: Acquisition Of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts And Further Information
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole vidual protection functions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the Circuit-breaker function block is generated there. To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals that must be routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 5-5).
Page 217 Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole These signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker positions can be reliably acquired. [loerfass-101210-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-21 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information Signal...
Page 218: Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Signal Type Description The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an OFF- >Ready ON-OFF cycle. The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip. The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test functions.
Page 219: Tripping And Opening Information
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole [lounterd-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-22 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression 5.5.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the fault log.
Page 220: Application And Setting Notes
Control function block The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions. Siemens recommends capturing the Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles and Circuit breaker is closed in 3 poles information via auxiliary contacts. This is the optimal configuration for the control functionality.
Page 221 Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole [loauswer-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-26 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection and Electronic Control Unit The following diagram shows the recommended routing, in which H stands for active with voltage. [scpolg3p-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-27 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts...
Page 222: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Measured Values If a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault log: • Break.-current phs A • Break.-current phs B • Break.-current phs C •...
Page 223: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of with trip always • breaking values always 5.5.7.8 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) Circuit break. _:500 Circuit break.:>Ready _:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking _:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist.
Page 224: Detection Manual Closure (For Arec And Process Monitor)
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole [lozust3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-29 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, the circuit breaker can assume the following positions: Circuit-Breaker Condi- Description tion...
Page 225: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole [lohand3p-101210-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 5-30 Logic for Manual Closure Detection External Manual Closure An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. Detection via the input signal >Input is also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Page 226: Settings
In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time. Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms. Parameter: CB open dropout delay •...
Page 227: Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Overview 5.6.1 The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker. You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can use for this device type.
Page 228 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole • Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions • Detection of manual closing • General settings The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-Breaker function group. The individual function blocks in the image are described in the following chapters. [dwfgalle-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-33 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group...
Page 229: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole • Voltage The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system or 1-phase voltage are supplied via this interface. Depending on the connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are for example, V of the line or feeder.
Page 230: Trip Logic
0.05 A for example. If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary purposes.
Page 231 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open (see 5.6.5.1 Overview ). The command output time is also effective here. In the trip logic, the decision is made whether to trigger 1-pole tripping or not (3-pole coupling) (see Figure 5-34).
Page 232 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole All other cases result in 3-pole operate. 3-Pole Coupling 3-pole coupling describes the situation when the trip logic decides to execute 3-pole tripping despite the pres- ence of a 1-pole operate indication. This may be the case under the following circumstances: •...
Page 233 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Input Output Reset of Trip Command [loauslbe-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-35 Reset of Trip Command Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-34). You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of trip command.
Page 234: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole • with I< & aux.contact With the criteria with I< and with I< & aux.contact, the condition of the circuit breaker is also taken into account as a further criterion in addition to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indi- cation is terminated by command).
Page 235 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole In some cases, 3-pole disconnection works better for this fault type: If the double line is situated close to a large generator block (see Figure 5-37). For the generator, both 1-phase ground faults are manifested as double ground faults with a correspondingly high dynamic load of the turbine shaft.
Page 236: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole 5.6.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Trip logic • _:101 Trip logic:Trip at 2ph short 3-pole 3-pole • circuit 1-pole, leading phase • 1-pole, lagging phase • _:102 Trip logic:3-pole coupling with pickup with trip •...
Page 237 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole [loaussch-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-38 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker Table 5-7 Description of the Output Signals Signal Description Routing Options • This signal executes all 3-pole tripping and opening oper- Unlatched Trip/open cmd.
Page 238: Acquisition Of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts And Further Information
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Signal Description Routing Options This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing Close command The Output time parameter affects the signal. The signal is pending for the duration of this period, with the following exception: The signal is canceled before expiration of the period if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed before expiration of the...
Page 239: Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Signal Type Description Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase A. Position 1-pole phsA The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase A open and/or the position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase A closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
Page 240: Tripping And Opening Information
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker tripping) occurs. This alarm should not to be issued if the circuit breaker is to be reclosed automatically after tripping or if it is to be closed or opened via the control.
Page 241: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole • Number of closings by the automatic reclosing function, broken down according to 1-pole and 3-pole as well as 1st cycle and other cycles • Total of breaking currents, cumulative and pole-selective The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control.
Page 242 • Control function block The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions. Depending on the application, Siemens recommends the following different interfaces for the auxiliary contacts: • The device performs protection and automatic reclosing functions without any control functionality.
Page 243 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole • The device performs protection, automatic reclosing, and control functions The information Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles must also be recorded via the auxiliary contacts to ensure optimum operation of the control functionality. The device derives the information Circuit breaker is closed in 3 poles (for the control functionality) automatically from the 1- pole information.
Page 244 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole CAUTION Do not set a time that is too short. If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out. Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position ²...
Page 245: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not cause an alarm (see the logic in 5.6.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Informa- tion...
Page 246: Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition For Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Information Data Class Type (Type) _:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B _:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C _:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours _:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary 5.6.6 Functions 5.6.6.1...
Page 247: Detection Manual Closure (For Arec And Process Monitor)
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Condition, Description Phase-Segregated Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when, while a trip command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current falling below the threshold value is detected because the current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact can open.
Page 248: Settings
In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time. Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms. Parameter: CB open dropout delay •...
Page 249: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Information Data Class Type (Type) _:300 Manual close:Detected 5.6.8 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Ref. for %-values _:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A current _:2311:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV Breaker settings...
Page 250: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:4201:104 Control:Check switching • authority • advanced • _:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • reached • _:4201:106 Control:Check double • activat. blk. • _:4201:107 Control:Check blk. by •...
Page 251 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Information Data Class Type (Type) _:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst _:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health _:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health _:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole _:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA _:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB _:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC _:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd.
Page 252 Function-Group Types 5.6 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker, 1-/3-Pole Information Data Class Type (Type) _:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station _:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 _:4201:309 Control:Enable sw. auth. 2 _:4201:310 Control:Enable sw. auth. 3 _:4201:311 Control:Enable sw. auth. 4 _:4201:312 Control:Enable sw. auth. 5 _:4201:313 Control:Switching authority _:4201:314...
Page 253: Function-Group Type Analog Units
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Function-Group Type Analog Units Overview 5.7.1 The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules, such as measuring-transducer modules. You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
Page 254 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [dwstrthe-030615-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 5-53 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group Gray: Optionally Wired, optionally available White: Always wired, always available The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function group provides measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit .
Page 255: 20-Ma Unit Ethernet
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 20-mA Unit Ethernet 5.7.3 5.7.3.1 Overview The function 20-mA unit Ether.: • Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values meas- ured by the 20-mA unit •...
Page 256: Communication With 20-Ma Unit Ethernet
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet Logic [lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-55 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet Communication with 20-mA Unit The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab- lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Page 257: Application And Setting Notes
The 7XV5674 20-mA unitis set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface. Set Modbus TCP as bus protocol/operating mode. You can find detailed notes on the settings in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area http://www.energy.siemens.com. 5.7.3.5 20-mA Channel Logic [lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]...
Page 258 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not displayed. If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed. Measured-Value Calculation The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre- sponding channel.
Page 259 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting.
Page 260: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Table 5-9 Error Responses Error Description Status Error Status Health The input value lies outside the given limits Channel not connected 5.7.3.6 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Unit • Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent.
Page 261: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.3.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:2311:103 General:Port port E port J • port F • port J • port N • port P Channel 1 • _:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit •...
Page 262: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active false • _:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 factor _:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA _:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 Sensor _:13111:106...
Page 263 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number setting, you specify the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Page 264: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:2311:103 General:Port port E port J • port F • port J • port N • port P _:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 _:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247...
Page 265: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • • 0.01 • 0.001 • _:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active false • _:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 factor _:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA _:13111:109...
Page 266 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Adding a USART Module Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202 expansion module (refer to the following figure).
Page 267 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-64 Making the Communication Settings With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see following figure).
Page 268: Integration Of A 20-Ma Unit Ethernet
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-66 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address Finally, load the configuration in the device. 5.7.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet Device Configuration In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configura- tion.
Page 269 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-68 Activation of the protocol This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to following figure). [scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-69 Selection of the Protocol With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function...
Page 270: V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit With Fast Inputs
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-70 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1 Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
Page 271: Structure Of The Function
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units • Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas pres- sure, etc. • Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).
Page 272: Application And Setting Notes
With the parameter Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the arith- metic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends setting the top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for further processing.
Page 273 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Parameter: Range active • Default setting (_:107) Range active = false If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA or -10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to +20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
Page 274 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US] Figure 5-74 Scaling Principle Setting Example 1: A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well below 4 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken wire. A sensor detecting a temperature is attached to the transmitter.
Page 275 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US] Figure 5-75 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1 NOTE The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special applications are possible, if necessary.
Page 276: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US] Figure 5-76 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V 5.7.6.5 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting MT fast # • _:101 MT in #:TD input-signal Voltage input Current input •...
Page 277 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:103 MT in #:Unit • ° • °C • °F • Ω • Ω/km • Ω/mi • • • • cos φ • cycles • • F/km •...
Page 278: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00 Sensor 5.7.6.6 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) MT in # _:302 MT in #:TD scale MV _:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV 5.7.7...
Page 279: Communication With An Rtd Unit
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit Logic [lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-78 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function Communication with an RTD Unit The function is used to communicate with an RTD box connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec- tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD box via the Ethernet interface, the RTD box transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD box Ether.
Page 280: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Error Description Status Health A communication module has not received any more Warning data from the RTD unit for 9 sec. Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure. 5.7.7.4 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Port...
Page 281: Temperature Sensor
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.7.5 Temperature Sensor Logic [lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-79 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block Measured Temperature Value The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the RTD unit for the assigned sensor.
Page 282: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Parameter: Temperature unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user default settings accordingly. Proceed as follows: • In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings. •...
Page 283: Rtd Unit, Serial
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Information Data Class Type (Type) Sensor 1 _:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health _:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure _:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut RTD Unit, Serial 5.7.8 5.7.8.1 Overview The RTD unit serial function: • Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas- ured temperatures from the RTD unit •...
Page 284: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units 5.7.8.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:2311:103 General:Port port F port J • port E • port P • port N • port J _:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 _:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 254...
Page 285: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Sensor 11 • _:11611:102 Sensor 11:Sensor type Pt 100 Pt 100 • Ni 100 • Ni 120 Sensor 12 • _:11611:102 Sensor 12:Sensor type Pt 100 Pt 100 •...
Page 286: Communication With Rtd Unit
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units Information Data Class Type (Type) Sensor 9 _:11619:52 Sensor 9:Health _:11619:60 Sensor 9:Failure _:11619:80 Sensor 9:TmpOut Sensor 10 _:11611:52 Sensor 10:Health _:11611:60 Sensor 10:Failure _:11611:80 Sensor 10:TmpOut Sensor 11 _:11611:52 Sensor 11:Health _:11611:60 Sensor 11:Failure _:11611:80 Sensor 11:TmpOut...
Page 287 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US] Figure 5-82 Insertion Position for a USART Module Selecting the SUP Protocol Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit. [scauser4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-83 Selecting the SUP Protocol...
Page 288 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-84 Making the Communication Settings With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD box serial 1 (refer to the following figure).
Page 289: Integration Of An Rtd-Unit Ethernet (Tr1200 Ip)
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-86 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address Finally, load the configuration in the device. 5.7.9.2 Integration of an RTD-Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP) Device Configuration In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configu- ration.
Page 290 Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-88 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to following figure). [scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-89 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (base module) With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function...
Page 291: Temperature Simulation Without Sensors
Function-Group Types 5.7 Function-Group Type Analog Units [scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US] Figure 5-90 Analog Unit Instance Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box. [scautcp5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US] Figure 5-91 Setting the Port and IP Address...
Page 292: Process Monitor
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor Process Monitor Overview of Functions 5.8.1 All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object. Structure of the Function 5.8.2 The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
Page 293: Current-Flow Criterion
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor [lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 5-93 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor 5.8.3 Current-Flow Criterion [loproikr-011112-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 5-94 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 294: Application And Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively. Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 295: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor Settings 5.8.5 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Breaker settings _:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A...
Page 296: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor Logic [loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-97 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection For an applied binary input signal (_:4681:500) >Disconnector openDetected (from function block Manual close), the indication (_:4681:300) ClosureClosure is active. 5.8.8 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type)
Page 297: Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) 5.8.9 Logic [loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 5-98 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva- tion of the line or protected object.
Page 298: Application And Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay curr.crit.
Page 299: Settings
Function-Group Types 5.8 Process Monitor Settings 5.8.11 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Cold-load PU • Cold-load PU:Mode • • test • _:101 Cold-load PU:Operating I open I open • mode CB and I open _:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A...
Page 300: Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
Function-Group Types 5.9 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection Voltage Measuring-Point Selection Overview of Functions 5.9.1 The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can: • Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group •...
Page 301: Application And Setting Notes
Function-Group Types 5.9 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection [scconnection, 1, en_US] Figure 5-100 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group: • The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the function group.
Page 302: Information List
Function-Group Types 5.9 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection NOTE An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID selection results in the following: • The voltage measured values are displayed as failure. • The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.
Page 303: Control Functions
Control Functions Introduction Switching Devices Control Functionality Synchronization Function Switching Sequences User-Defined Function Block [Control] CFC-Chart Settings Transformer Tap Changers Voltage Controller SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 304: Introduction
Control Functions 6.1 Introduction Introduction Overview 6.1.1 The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func- tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
Page 305 Control Functions 6.1 Introduction [sc_control, 1, en_US] Position (connect with binary inputs) Signalization of the current condition Command output (connect with relay) The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice between saved and unsaved output is possible.
Page 306 Control Functions 6.1 Introduction 4 different control models are available: • Direct without feedback monitoring ( direct w. normal secur. ) • With reservation (SBO) without feedback monitoring ( SBO w. normal secur. ) • Direct with feedback monitoring ( direct w. enh. security ) •...
Page 307: Switching Devices
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Switching Devices General Overview 6.2.1 The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching- devices function groups (see the following images). [sccbausw, 1, en_US] Figure 6-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group Menu [scswausw, 1, en_US] Figure 6-3...
Page 308 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-4 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
Page 309 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices NOTE When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library: - 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole tripping) - Circuit breaker (status only) Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker...
Page 310 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Properties Function To Be Found in When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control function Suppress intermediate position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block the duration of the software filtering time. If you select the General soft- Position of the Control function Treatment of spontaneous position changes (Gen.
Page 311: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices 6.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes Circuit Breaker The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs. The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
Page 312 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Signal Name Description Type Default Value if Signal Quality = invalid External health The binary input External health reflects the Unchanged circuit-breaker status (EHealth). This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS block.
Page 313: Connection Variants Of The Circuit Breaker
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values 0.01 s to 1800 s (_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s (Increment: 0.01 s) (_:4201:104) Check switching authority advanced (_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached (_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes (_:4201:107) Check blk.
Page 314 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Table 6-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants Binary output L+; L- Control voltage Trip command Close command Table 6-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI Unsaved trip command...
Page 315 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices 1-Pole Triggering [dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-8 1-Pole Triggering [scrang1pLS1p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-9 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The letter U represents an unlatched command.
Page 316 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices 1.5-Pole Triggering [dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-10 1.5-Pole Triggering [scrang1pLS15p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-11 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 317 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices 2-Pole Triggering [dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-12 2-Pole Triggering [scrang1pLS13p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-13 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit breaker.
Page 318 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open poles are closed. [dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-14 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
Page 319 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [scrang1pLS13pz, 1, en_US] Figure 6-16 Routing in DIGSI In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the 3 phases (Trip/open cmd.
Page 320 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US] Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position The routing of the binary inputs for feedback of the switch position is done as shown in the previous figure (also see Chapter 5.6.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information).
Page 321: Settings
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [scrang1pLSHk, 1, en_US] Figure 6-17 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 6-8 Table 6-9. The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if either an On or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
Page 322 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:2311:136 General:Op. mode unbalancing unbalancing • I> query Trip logic • _:5341:101 Trip logic:Trip at 3-pole 3-pole • 2ph short circuit 1-pole, leading phase • 1-pole, lagging phase •...
Page 323: Information List
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:4201:155 Control:Ident. Freely editable text sw.auth. 1 _:4201:156 Control:Ident. Freely editable text sw.auth. 2 _:4201:157 Control:Ident. Freely editable text sw.auth. 3 _:4201:158 Control:Ident. Freely editable text sw.auth. 4 _:4201:159 Control:Ident.
Page 324 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Information Data Class Type (Type) _:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression _:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. _:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A _:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B _:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C _:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. _:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. _:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. _:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk.
Page 325: Disconnector Switching Device
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Information Data Class Type (Type) CB test _:6151:53 CB test:Health _:6151:301 CB test:Test execution _:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued _:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued _:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled _:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close _:6151:312 CB test:Pole A open-close _:6151:313 CB test:Pole B open-close _:6151:314...
Page 326 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 6-18 Control-Relevant Function Blocks of the Disconnector Switching Device The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit breaker).
Page 327 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Function Blocks of the Disconnector Table 6-10 Function Blocks of the Disconnector Function Group Function Description Parameters Function Block Discon- The disconnector represents The disconnector replicates Maximum output time nector the physical switch in the the switch position from the Seal-in time SIPROTEC 5 device.
Page 328 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Characteristics Function To Be Found in If the General software Spontaneous position Position of the Control function changes filtered by (Gen. filter setting is selected, the block Software Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) general settings for software filtering of spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command...
Page 329: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices 6.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes Disconnector The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs. The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
Page 330 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 6-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block Table 6-14 Table 6-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs, the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described. Table 6-14 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block Signal Name...
Page 331: Trigger Variants Of The Disconnector
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices Signal Name Description Type The information counts the number of disconnector Op.ct. switching cycles. Control It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed (see also chapter 6.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Page 332 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-21 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. 1.5-Pole Triggering [dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-22 1.5-Pole Triggering SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual...
Page 333 Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [scrangtrenn15p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-23 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI 2-Pole Triggering [dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-24 2-Pole Triggering SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 334: Settings
Control Functions 6.2 Switching Devices [scrangtrenn2p, 1, en_US] Figure 6-25 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector. 6.2.3.4 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Disconnector _:5401:101 Disconnector:Maximum 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s output time _:5401:102...
Page 335: Control Functionality
Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality Control Functionality Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection 6.3.1 Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the command: • Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked) • Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote) •...
Page 336 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality Confirmation ID Meaning Description Switching Authority Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with the key switch position. The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values: •...
Page 337 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality Table 6-17 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks Command Check Switching Mode Interlocked Non-Interlocked Switching authority Checked Checked Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked 1-out-of-n check (double-activation Checked Not checked blocking)
Page 338 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-28 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block General) Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC.
Page 339 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality The signals shown in Figure 6-28 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship: • In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the input signal and the input signals in the matrix. •...
Page 340 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality The following additional settings are available for the switching authority: • Activation of Switching Authority Station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2): If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control. •...
Page 341 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command sources when using Station and Remote). Table 6-20 Result of a Switching-Authority Check Cause Source...
Page 342 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [sc_act additional options sw authority, 3, en_US] Figure 6-32 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority The additional parameters allow you to set the following options: • Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station): With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check is used.
Page 343 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality • Num. of specific sw.auth.: With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter- mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable Active. Sw. auth.. •...
Page 344 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US] Figure 6-33 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit.
Page 345 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US] Figure 6-34 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured.
Page 346 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the states only for this switching device. When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed. [sc_Parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US] Figure 6-37 Parameters of the FB Control with all Additional Options...
Page 347 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality • Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions: These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked. Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium- voltage switch. Each of the two categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure below).
Page 348 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [ScAbgang-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US] Figure 6-40 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure. [scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-41 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is not necessary for interlocking.
Page 349 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 6-41). EXAMPLE For system interlocking This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the...
Page 350 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality 1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking) The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block. The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
Page 351 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality You can use the function block Ext. 1-of-N check in the Circuit breaker and Disconnector function groups. In order to use the function, a control model with feedback monitoring must be configured in the circuit- breaker control.
Page 352 Blocking by Protection Function • Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be issued while protection functions have picked up. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual...
Page 353: Command Logging
Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 6-44). NOTE Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus prevent switching commands.
Page 354 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [scbbcon1-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-49 Positive Case (Display 1) [scbbcon2-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-50 Positive Case (Display 2) SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 355 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [scbbcon3-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-51 Positive Case (Display 3) [scbbcon4-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-52 Positive Case with Command Cancellation SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 356 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [scbbcon5-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-53 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking) [scbbcon7-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-54 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1) SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 357 Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [scbbcon8-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-55 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2) [scbbcon9-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-56 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 3) SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 358: Application Notes And Setting Notes For The External 1-Of-N Check Function Block
Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality [scbbcon6-270313-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-57 Spontaneous Status Change Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable and the switching device can be contained in the log. The following table shows the relationship.
Page 359: Settings
Control Functions 6.3 Control Functionality Settings 6.3.4 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Control • _:101 Control:Control model status only SBO w. enh. • direct w. normal secur. security • SBO w. normal secur. • direct w. enh. security • SBO w.
Page 360: Synchronization Function
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Synchronization Function Overview of Functions 6.4.1 The Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk to the stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system. Typical applications are as follows: •...
Page 361: Connection And Definition
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-58 Structure/Embedding of the Function Connection and Definition 6.4.3 Connection You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 6-61 shows an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler. The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2).
Page 362 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-59 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs [dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-60 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 363 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-61 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs [dwsyndyn-221211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-62 Synchronization with Dynamic Measuring-Point Toggling at 1.5 Circuit Breaker Usage SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 364 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Definition of the Variables The definition of the variables is important for understanding the following implementation. The reference side 1 indicates the function with 1. This yields the reference values voltage V1, frequency f1, and phase angle α1.
Page 365: General Functionality
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function General Functionality 6.4.4 6.4.4.1 Description Overview of a Synchronization Stage (Sync Stage) A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks (see Figure 6-64): • Stage control with mode, state control, standby and blocking (description in this chapter) •...
Page 366 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Note the following special features: • As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calculated and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to start the stage for this purpose.
Page 367 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Supervision The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the monitors picks up, the Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is not possible in this case.
Page 368: Application And Setting Notes (General)
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal >Selection (synchronization stage x). The closing conditions are checked if the respective stage is activated via the >Selection binary signal and the stage is activated. The fault indication Multiple selection is issued upon simultaneous selection of different synchroniza- tion stages.
Page 369 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Stage Type Application Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch posi- tion. If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present.
Page 370 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [lohyster-010415-01.vsd, 1, en_US] If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in the area of the hysteresis.
Page 371: Settings
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-66 Transformer Between the Measuring Points If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized, you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 6-66 shows such an application.
Page 372: Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • • test _:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V operating limit Vmin _:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V operat.
Page 373 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dwdynmsu-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-67 Synchronization in a Breaker-and-a-Half Arrangement Each synchronization function requires 2 comparison voltages. For the circuit breaker QA2 located in the middle, there are 2 options for each side (V and V ).
Page 374 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group: • The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface. • It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN. •...
Page 375: Sequence Of Functions
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Sequence of Functions 6.4.6 [losynf01-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-70 Sequence of Functions Start The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be started device-internally by the controller or externally, via binary input signals (see section 6.4.13 Interaction with Control and External Triggering At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection by the synchronization stage (see section...
Page 376 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function signaled. An adjustable supervision time is started after the closure conditions are fulfilled (parameter CB make time). If the conditions remain valid until expiry of the time, the function gives the release for closure after expiry of the time. Direct Close Command If the Direct close command operation is active, the function instantaneously initiates the release for closure after the successful start (see chapter...
Page 377: Stage Synchrocheck
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Stage Synchrocheck 6.4.7 6.4.7.1 Description Checking Closing Conditions [losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-71 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Function With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec- trical power system.
Page 378: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function 6.4.7.2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Maximum Differential Values of Voltage, Frequency and Angle • Default setting (_:5071:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V • Default setting (_:5071:123) Max. voltage diff. V2
Page 379: Information List
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Synchr. conditions _:5071:122 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff. V2>V1 _:5071:123 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff. V2
Page 380: Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) _:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2f1) _:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2α1) _:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1:α...
Page 381 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Checking the Closing Conditions in Synchronous Systems [losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-72 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN.
Page 382 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-73 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 383 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Checking Closing Conditions in Asynchronous Systems [losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-74 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ- ence Δα...
Page 384: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-75 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and Frequency (f) 6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Synchronous operating mode, Asynchronous operating mode • Default setting (_:5041:119) Sync. operating mode = off •...
Page 385 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description Regardless of the frequency difference and the threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the operating mode active is exclusively asynchronous. The closing time of the circuit breaker is this always taken into account for determining the connecting point.
Page 386: Settings
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asynchro- nous operation. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz. 6.4.8.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General •...
Page 387: Information List
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:5041:122 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff. V2>V1 _:5041:123 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff. V2
Page 388: Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous With Balancing Commands
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) _:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2α1) _:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) _:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded _:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error 6.4.9 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous with Balancing Commands 6.4.9.1 Description With this stage type, a distinction by synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made.
Page 389 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Checking Closing Conditions of Synchronous Systems [losynsyn_adj_comm, 1, en_US] Figure 6-76 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication. The parameters ΔV and Δα...
Page 390 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynzus_adj_comm, 1, en_US] Figure 6-77 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 391 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Checking Closing Conditions of Asynchronous Systems [losynasy_adj_comm, 1, en_US] Figure 6-78 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The function calculates the time of the close command taking into account the angle difference Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker.
Page 392 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynarb_adj_comm, 1, en_US] Figure 6-79 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and Frequency (f) Balancing Commands for Voltage and Frequency The stage has 2 separate blocks, split according to balancing commands for the voltage and the frequency. The balancing pulses for increasing or decreasing the voltage and the frequency are generated in each block.
Page 393 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function with: Measured differential voltage Measured value Parameter for default speed of set point value change dV per second The following figure shows the effect of the functionality. When the voltage range limits fall short by approxi- mately 1/8 of the voltage range, the stage no longer issues any voltage balancing commands.
Page 394 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dw_build_frequency-adjusting-com, 1, en_US] Figure 6-81 Generation of Balancing Commands for Frequency If the speed (frequency) was adjusted in such a way that the differential frequency df ≈ is 0, the voltage phasors of V1 and V2 are practically standing still. This can result in an angle difference that does not allow any switching.
Page 395: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dw_kick-pulse_freq-adj-com, 1, en_US] Figure 6-82 Kick Pulse and Frequency Adjustment Ranges Stabilization and Supervision Actions The parameter Smoothing causes a smoothing of the relevant measuring signal (dV and df) via a recursive filter. The smoothing of the signals prevents wrong balancing commands from being issued to control the voltage and frequency in case of a strong fluctuation of the signals.
Page 396 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [sc_FBadjcomm, 1, en_US] Figure 6-83 Extract from the DIGSI Library Delete the stages of the synchronization function that are not used. Routing the Voltage Transformers to the Measuring Points NOTE Ensure that the transformer connections available in the specific application are routed to the correct meas- uring point! You can find the routing in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Function-group connections →...
Page 397 In the FG Circuit breaker, under General, set the rated voltage that is used as a reference for percentage- value scaling. Siemens recommends routing the functional measured values into the fault record in addition to the logical signals. Route at least the functional measured values (_:2311:300) dV , (_:2311:301) df , and (_: 2311:302) dα...
Page 398 Figure 6-87 General Block for Syn./Asy.Bal. Stage in the DIGSI Setting Sheet If you want to switch the generator to a dead busbar (black start), Siemens recommends keeping the default values and controlling the release via the binary input signal (_:506) >Op.
Page 399 You can find this parameter in the Synchr. op.mode block. Siemens recommends keeping the default setting value of 0.01 Hz. This parameter is also taken into account when the kick pulse has been activated (see Figure 6-82).
Page 400 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Parameter: T V pulse max • Default setting (_:133) T V pulse max = 1.00 s With the parameter T V pulse max, you set the maximum time of the control pulse. The default setting is a practicable value.
Page 401 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dw_characteristic-adjusting-com, 1, en_US] Figure 6-89 Effect of Smoothing Depending on the Set Parameter Parameter: (V/Vrated)/(f/frated) • Default setting (_:137) (V/Vrated)/(f/frated) = 1.10 With the parameter (V/Vrated)/(f/frated), you specify the overexcitation threshold. The default setting is a typical value. Note that the thresholds refer to primary voltages. You can also easily calculate with secondary values, as the voltage transformers are usually exactly adjusted to the rated voltage of the plant.
Page 402 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function • Δf set point for balancing • Smoothing • T close without balancing • Release for the kick pulse • Δf for the kick pulse • Stabilization Parameter: Balancing frequency f2 • Default setting (_:141) Balancing frequency f2 = off With the parameter Balancing frequency f2, you specify whether you wish to issue balancing commands for the frequency f2 on the generator side or not.
Page 403 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Parameter: T pause f • Default setting (_:145) T pause f = 10.00 s With the parameter T pause f, you set the dead time between the balancing commands. This allows the controller and the generator to respond to the control pulse. Determine the final setting value during commis- sioning.
Page 404 Siemens only recommends this setting value if you wish to achieve fast synchronization by means of short dead times or for special applications.
Page 405: Settings
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function 6.4.9.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • • test _:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V ating limit Vmin _:102 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V operat.
Page 406: Information List
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 ° angle diff. α2>α1 _:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 ° angle diff. α2<α1 _:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s close command Balancing V...
Page 407 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:502 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Start / stop syn.proc. _:503 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Start syn. process _:504 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Stop syn. process _:506 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1' _:505 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' _:507 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' _:501 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block close command _:511 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block balancing...
Page 408: Expanded Checks (Df/Dt And Smoothing Of Oscillations)
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations) 6.4.10 When configuring the Expanded delta-f options function block, you can expand the synchronization checks to include the following aspects: • Limitation of the frequency change rate With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of permissible requency difference change.
Page 409: Closing At De-Energized Line/Busbar
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar 6.4.11 6.4.11.1 Description If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system can be connected together via the following operating modes. If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the part of the electrical power system is detected.
Page 410: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-91 Release Conditions for Switching to De-Energized Line/Busbar The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1 fulfilled and Cond. V1
Page 411 For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no. Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no for reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also...
Page 412: Direct Close Command
The setting value indicates the voltage below which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be regarded as deactivated with certainty. Siemens recommends a setting value of approx. 5 % of the rated voltage for this. All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test.
Page 413: Interaction With Control And External Triggering
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Interaction with Control and External Triggering 6.4.13 With Control The control and synchronization function are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. The control and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function group Circuit breaker.
Page 414: External Synchronization
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [losynaw3-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 6-94 Interaction of the Synchronization Function with External Control External Synchronization 6.4.14 6.4.14.1 Description The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 415 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 1, en_US] Figure 6-95 Triggering an External Synchronization Device The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x.
Page 416 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function [dwextsyn-02, 1, en_US] Figure 6-96 Interaction between Control and External Synchronization Parameterization with DIGSI In the DIGSI library, the function is visible inside the Circuit-breaker function group as the External synchro- nization function block. You can instantiate the function block in the Circuit-breaker function group and the Circuit-breaker (control) function group.
Page 417: Application And Setting Notes (External Synchronization)
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Notes for Optional Input Interconnections You have the option of connecting the input signals >Close cmd. released and >In progress . If you omit these interconnections, observe the following instructions: Input >Close cmd. released : If you do not interconnect the input signal >Close cmd.
Page 418: Settings
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function 6.4.14.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • • test _:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V ating limit Vmin _:102 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V operat.
Page 419 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 ° angle diff. α2>α1 _:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 ° angle diff. α2<α1 _:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s close command Balancing V...
Page 420: Information List
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:110 External sync.:Direct false • close command 6.4.14.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) External sync. _:506 External sync.:>Synch. device ready _:508 External sync.:>In progress _:507 External sync.:>Close cmd. released _:509 External sync.:>Op.
Page 421 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.1 s sion time Synchr. conditions _:5071:122 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff. V2>V1 _:5071:123 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V voltage diff.
Page 422: Information List
Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:5041:117 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz frequency diff. f2>f1 _:5041:118 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz frequency diff. f2
Page 423 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Information Data Class Type (Type) Synchrocheck 1 _:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage _:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection _:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start / stop syn.proc. _:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process _:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process _:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1' _:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op.
Page 424 Control Functions 6.4 Synchronization Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' _:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' _:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command _:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive _:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior _:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health _:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress _:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. _:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync.
Page 425: Switching Sequences
Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences Switching Sequences Overview of Functions 6.5.1 Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci- fied sequence. A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5 Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
Page 426 Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences [dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 6-99 Switching Sequence Function Block Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence: • On-site operation: menu or display page •...
Page 427: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences Figure 6-100 Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display Application and Setting Notes 6.5.3 The function block offers similar settings as the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see chapter 6.2.1 General Overview).
Page 428 Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences Parameter: Control model • Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur. With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w. normal secur. to start the switching sequence. It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence.
Page 429 Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences [dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 6-103 Example of a Substation The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 6-104) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened; followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors. [Scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US] Figure 6-104 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off...
Page 430: Settings
Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences Command Execution As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 426, the display page or the Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC- DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Page 431: Information List
Control Functions 6.5 Switching Sequences Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:102 Swi. seq. #:Check double • activat. blk. • _:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out true • monitoring _:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s time •...
Page 432: User-Defined Function Block [Control]
Control Functions 6.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] User-Defined Function Block [Control] Overview of Functions 6.6.1 The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command and the check of whether the circuit breaker has reached the position for user-defined controllables. Function Description 6.6.2 The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5...
Page 433: Settings
Control Functions 6.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] [scfbudct, 1, en_US] Figure 6-106 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control] Parameter: Check switching authority • Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of switching commands must be checked (see chapter 6.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Page 434: Information List
Control Functions 6.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Switching authority • _:150 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • swi.auth. for Mode • _:151 U-def.FB ctl.#:Swi.dev. false • related sw.auth. • _:152 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific true • sw. authorities • _:115 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific station...
Page 435: Cfc-Chart Settings
Control Functions 6.7 CFC-Chart Settings CFC-Chart Settings Overview of Functions 6.7.1 If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters.
Page 436: Settings
Control Functions 6.7 CFC-Chart Settings You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart. Parameter: Chart setting Int •...
Page 437: Transformer Tap Changers
Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Transformer Tap Changers Function Description 6.8.1 With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor the proper execution of the adjusting commands. The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervision functions.
Page 438 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Example The following 2 figures show a CFC chart as an example for transformer tap control with the routing of the function keys for stepping up or stepping down. [schilocd-280316-01, 2, en_US] Figure 6-109 Routing of the Function Keys and CFC Signals To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications (SPS).
Page 439 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers You can select the control direction using the following values at the Val input of the BSC_DEF block. • 1 means step up • 0 means step down [scbivctv-280715-01, 3, en_US] Figure 6-110 CFC Chart Using this simple CFC chart, pressing the function keys to step up or down incrementally can be displayed.
Page 440 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers The value of 0 during an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage represents a special case. An invalid tap-changer position without a corresponding adjusting command is signaled only as an invalid tap position in the Position controllable.
Page 441: Application And Setting Notes
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing of the motor sliding contact.
Page 442 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Parameter: SBO time-out • Default setting (_:109) SBO time-out = 30 s With this setting, you specify the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Page 443 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers [scdeegts-170216-01, 1, en_US] Figure 6-113 Properties Dialog Parameter: Minimum value • Default setting Minimum value = 1 Parameter: Maximum value • Default setting Maximum value = 15 The parameters Minimum value and Maximum value are initially calculated by DIGSI 5 based on the tap coding, the Number of tap positions, and the Tap-display offset.
Page 444 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Parameter: Number of tap positions • Default setting Number of tap positions = 15 With the Number of tap positions parameter, you set the number of transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 127. The output of the tap position is limited from -63 to +63. If the number of taps is >...
Page 445 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Table 6-26 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD) Example Tap changer Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 BCD 4 BCD 8 BCD 10 BCD 20 Moving contact Tap = 21 With 6 binary inputs, a maximum of 39 tap positions can be mapped with the tap-coding type of BCD. This results in the number of tap positions from 1 to 39.
Page 446 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers NOTE If the binary inputs used for encoding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of the display offset). For an invalid tap position, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid, exception BCD signed, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed), Page 446.
Page 447: Settings (Properties Dialog)
Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Parameter: Moving contact (highest binary input) • Default setting Moving contact (highest binary input) = no If the tap position is not to be recognized as valid and accepted until the motor sliding contact signals that it has reached the taps, then activate the Moving contact (highest binary input) option.
Page 448: Settings
Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Settings 6.8.4 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Control • _:104 Tap changer:Check • switching authority • advanced • _:108 Tap changer:Control status only SBO w. enh. • model direct w. normal secur. security •...
Page 449 Control Functions 6.8 Transformer Tap Changers Information Data Class Type (Type) _:508 Tap changer:>Sw. authority remote _:509 Tap changer:>Sw. mode interlocked _:510 Tap changer:>Sw. mode non-interl. _:504 Tap changer:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst _:53 Tap changer:Health _:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached _:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached _:308 Tap changer:Position _:305...
Page 450: Voltage Controller
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Voltage Controller Overview of Functions 6.9.1 The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two- winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using a motor-operated tap changer. In addition, the voltage control can be used for two-winding transformers connected in parallel.
Page 451: Function Description
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller The functions General (GAPC), Tap changer (YLTC), and Voltage controller (ATCC) are logical node points in IEC 61850-8-1. The tap changer (YLTC) is the interface between the voltage controller (ATCC) and the motor-operated tap changer of the transformer (OLTC). This means that the voltage controller (ATCC) sends higher and lower adjusting commands to the tap changer.
Page 452 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller This function is designed to control the following: • For two-winding transformers (2W): the voltage on the secondary circuit of the power transformer and parallel control of several transformers feeding the same busbar or a nodal point of a system •...
Page 453 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dwkonlsK-060913.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 6-119 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers without Current Measurement Three-Winding Transformers Three-winding transformers are special power transformers that have 2 separate windings on the secondary circuit and typically supply 2 different busbars. The voltage levels on the secondary circuit of the power trans- formers can either be the same or different.
Page 454 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dw_V-constell-3wind-with-imeas.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-120 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for Load Compensation at the End of the Line Only if a transformer side is available SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 455 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dw_V-constell-3wind-without-imeas-091014.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-121 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers without Current Measure- ment Grid Coupling Transformers Grid coupling transformers are special power transformers that connect 2 electrical power systems to one another. The load-side voltage is controlled. The power flow can change during operation. That is why both voltages and currents, winding 1 and winding 2, voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and current measuring inputs (I1 and I2) must be fed.
Page 456 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dw_V-constell-2wind-coupl-transf.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 6-122 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Grid Coupling Transformers On-Load Tap Changer On-load tap changers are used to set the desired tap of a stepped winding of the transformer while under load. During switchover, the desired tap of the stepped winding is first selected by means of the tap selector. Next, the on-load tap changer switches over from the current-carrying tap to the selected tap.
Page 457 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller You can set the voltage controller operating mode using the Operating mode parameter or the Operating mode command to automatic operation or manual operation. In automatic operation, the voltage is controlled automatically in accordance with the set parameters. Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the feedback control are permanently defined.
Page 458: Logic Of The Function
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller 6.9.3.2 Logic of the Function [lovoltco-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US] Figure 6-123 Higher-Level Logic of the Voltage Controller In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard, DOI LTCBlk (Block automatic operation command), automatic control can be blocked with a command. The voltage controller measures the actual voltage (Vact) and compares it to the target voltage (Vtarget).
Page 459: Control Response
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives: • Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device • Via an online DIGSI connection to the device • Via binary inputs • Via a communication connection to substation automation technology (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) You can find more information in chapter 3.10.1 Settings-Group Switching.
Page 460 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Actual voltage outside the bandwidth after T1, switching procedure initiated Switching procedure concluded, actual voltage within the bandwidth Linear, Inverse With linear control response, the voltage controller reacts independently of the control deviation after the set time T1 delay.
Page 461 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Larger Voltage Deviations [dwistgro-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-126 Actual-Voltage Curve During Larger Control Deviations Actual voltage outside the bandwidth The change to a higher tap occurs after T1 and then T2 Actual voltage inside the bandwidth Actual voltage outside the limit for a fast step down.
Page 462: Function Supervision
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller 6.9.3.4 Function Supervision Automatic Operation If the actual voltage exceeds or falls below the set bandwidth for longer than the set time delay, this situation is shown by the indication (_:14011:309) Auto Monitor . If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range, the indication is reset.
Page 463 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dwregchr-090913-01.vsd, 3, en_US] Figure 6-129 Control Characteristic with Z Compensation X and R Compensation (LDC-XandR) During the application of the X and R compensation, you need the phase data. With this data, it is possible to precisely compensate the voltage drop of the transmission lines.
Page 464: Limiting Values
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Load current load φ Rotor angle You can also use X and R compensation for parallel control of transformers. If the X value is positive, the voltage losses of the phase are compensated. If you are implementing parallel control with X and R compensa- tion, then the X value is negative and considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the transformer.
Page 465: Parallel Control
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-131 Logic Blockings If transformer differential protection is available If a current measurement is available If parallel proxys are available (max. 7) If assignment of the tap changer for the transformer side is available, the current of the upper-voltage side is also monitored and the differential-protection pickup automatically blocks the voltage controller.
Page 466 As the preceding table shows, before selecting the method, you must check whether the corresponding requirements are met. If you place transformers in parallel, whose short-circuit voltages differ by more than 10 % from each other, then Siemens recommends the Method of minimizing the circulating reactive current.
Page 467 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_grouping_vc, 1, en_US] Figure 6-132 Properties Tab of the Parallel Group You can change this assignment during operation by command, depending on the switching state. Logic of the Function [lo_proxy-logic-part_01, 1, en_US] Figure 6-133 Grouping Logic Parallel-Control Detection via Group Inputs You can control up to 8 transformers in parallel in one group or in 4 groups without detecting the system topology.
Page 468 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller changed using the control Parallel group. Thus, you assign the device to a parallel-control group. You can do this from remote or locally on the device. If No mode is set for the parallel operation, no group assign- ment takes place.
Page 469 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [lo_proxy-logic-part_02, 1, en_US] Figure 6-135 Logic of the Parallel-Control State Detection Controlling Locally/Remote The parallel control can be done by setting or via the control. With the parameter setting controllable, with a CFC block, you can also use a binary input and the status signal of a circuit breaker (Figure 6-138).
Page 470 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_hmi_oper, 1, en_US] Figure 6-137 Menu Item for Parallel Control on the Device Display Figure 6-138 shows an example of a CFC chart for switching to the parallel mode via the binary input of the circuit breaker.
Page 471 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Logic of the Master-Follower Method [lo_parallel_voltage_contrl-master-follower, 1, en_US] Figure 6-139 Logic of the Master-Follower Method The Master-Follower method can be blocked using the automatic function in the systems control. The func- tion is also blocked in case of a communication failure. The Master device controls the voltage of the transformer.
Page 472 The Automatic mode is blocked in the Master device and all Follower devices. Method of Minimizing the Circulating Reactive Current If the ratios of the transformers connected in parallel are different (>10 %), Siemens recommends the method of minimizing the circulating reactive current. The prerequisite for the method of minimizing the circu- lating reactive current is a data exchange between the ATCC function blocks (one ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group).
Page 473 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [fo_reakccm, 1, en_US] This direct-axis resistance is transferred to the other voltage controllers as a measured value via GOOSE. This value is displayed for control. To determine the total load current, the measured current with magnitude and phase angle is transferred as a GOOSE CMV measured value by each voltage controller.
Page 474 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Reactance of the transformer Total susceptance (total susceptance value) of all parallel transformers (sum of the reciprocals of the transformer reactance) Susceptance of the transformer (reciprocal of the reactance) Rated voltage of the transformer rated With the parameter Reactive I control factor, you can adjust the control deviation D so that the CRCk...
Page 475 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [scblockVC-240117-01, 1, en_US] Figure 6-141 Parameter in the Voltage Controller The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions. [loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-142 Blocking Logic If transformer differential protection is available If a current measurement is available If parallel proxies are available (max.
Page 476: Creating A Goose Later Binding For Parallel Control
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Supervision of the Communication A communication fault can occur in the following cases: • The connection between 2 SIPROTEC 5 devices is interrupted. • A hardware or software error is present in the device. • The supply voltage of one or more devices is not present.
Page 477 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_dev_set, 1, en_US] Figure 6-144 IEC 61850 Structure Settings For using Port J for the GOOSE communication: • Activate the device functionality for Port J. [sc_para_dev_func, 1, en_US] Figure 6-145 Setting for the Integrated Ethernet Interface •...
Page 478 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_instanz, 1, en_US] Figure 6-146 Selecting Parallel Control • Make the necessary communication settings. [sc_para_com_prot, 1, en_US] Figure 6-147 Ethernet-interface settings NOTE Note that you must assign a separate IP address for each device. NOTE Note the hardware equipment of the device and the settings for the IEC 61850 communication (IEC 61850 Edition 2 required).
Page 479 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_change_edition, 1, en_US] Figure 6-148 Changing the IEC 61850 Edition • Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes . Step 2 • Copy the 1st device as many times as are needed for the parallel transformers. The copied devices contain the same settings.
Page 480 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_ether_portj, 1, en_US] Figure 6-149 Adapting the IP Address • Adapt the entries of the copied devices for the other transformers (device name and IEC 61850 name). [sc_lbnametrafo, 1, en_US] Figure 6-150 Adapting the Devices in DIGSI •...
Page 481 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller NOTE Note that in the Master-Follower method, you must configure one device as the Master device and the additional devices as Follower devices. [sc_par_trafo_id, 1, en_US] Figure 6-151 Adapting the Parallel Transformer ID in DIGSI Step 3 •...
Page 482 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_par_exp_syscon, 1, en_US] Figure 6-154 Export to the IEC 61850 System Configurator If the following dialog appears, confirm with OK and specify a storage location for the SCD file. [sc_para_assinged, 1, en_US] Figure 6-155 Export dialog Step 4 •...
Page 483 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [sc_para_single_line_konfig, 1, en_US] Figure 6-156 Creating a Single-Line Configuration in the System Configurator • Create a substation. Right-click Parallel operation and select Substation . • Create the individual bays (bays 1-3) and instantiate for each a function and subfunction. •...
Page 484: Functional Measured Values
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller • Connect the LN Trafo1\VCtrl1\ATCC1 of the device to the function and the other LN Trafo2\Ctrl_90VParallelOperation\ProxyATCC1 to the proxies according to Figure 6-156. Step 5 • Create a new GOOSE application and subsequently perform the GOOSE later binding using the applica- tion template.
Page 485 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Measured Values, Two-Winding Transformer Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to Current, measured positive- Target voltage of the primary V act. sequence voltage (referenced system referenced to the rated to phase-to-phase) voltage Voltage difference between Voltage difference referenced ΔV act.
Page 486 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to Phase angle of the load current ° ° Phase angle of the load current PhAng relative to the voltage with a 100 % = 180° power factor of 1.0 For the parallel control, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the device: •...
Page 487 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Measured Values Grid Coupling Transformer Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to Actual voltage of winding 1 Target voltage of the primary Vact.w1 system referenced to the rated voltage Actual voltage of winding 2 Target voltage of the primary Vact.w2 system referenced to the rated...
Page 488: Application And Setting Notes
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Table 6-30 Possible Fundamental Values for the Voltage Controller Function Group Fundamental-Component Values Primar Secon- % Referenced to dary Phase currents Rated operating current of the primary system Zero-sequence current Rated operating current of the primary system Phase-to-ground voltages Rated operating voltage of the...
Page 489 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformer: General Winding 1 Parameter: Rated current • Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A Parameter: Rated voltage • Default setting (_:2311:103) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV Winding 2 Parameter: Rated current •...
Page 490: Controlling
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Grid Coupling Transformer only: Parameter: Winding selection • Default setting (_:16351:161) Winding selection = Winding 1 With the Winding selectionparameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of Winding 1 or Winding 2. You may select the winding to be controlled using the Winding selection parameter or the Manual winding selection controllable.
Page 491 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Parameter: Target voltage 2 • Default setting (_:14011:157) Target voltage 2 = 110.000 V With the Target voltage 2 parameter, you specify the 2nd voltage that the voltage controller is supposed to reach. Parameter: Target voltage 3 •...
Page 492 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Grid Coupling Transformer only: Parameter: Number of target voltage • Default setting (_:16351:164) Number of target voltage = 1 With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can select a target voltage from the available ones using the function key, communication, or binary input.
Page 493 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller On the secondary side, the increment ∆V is not linear. The largest ∆V in an increment results with the max,sec increment to the highest stage (smallest ratio) and with maximum power-system voltage on the primary side. [fobdnvrz-150816, 1, en_US] If the control deviation and the bandwidth are thus correlated, this results in a minimal bandwidth that is to be set:...
Page 494 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller [dwrglchr-160913-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 6-159 Inverse Control Characteristic Parameter: T1 Inverse Min • Default setting (_:116) T1 Inverse Min = 5 s With the T1 Inverse Min parameter, you define the minimum time delay for the control action. This time applies only to the control response Inverse and the response cannot be shorter.
Page 495: Line Compensation
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step down mode. If the actual voltage is greater than the value of the limit for the fast step down mode (_:122), the fast step down mode is activated. A fast step down mode is not activated if the voltage limit is exceeded for only a brief period within the time delay.
Page 496 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Target voltage at the end of the line SetComp Target voltage Load current in % load With the following equation, you can determine the percentage of the primary load current of the line from the rated current of the transformer k (k = 1, 2, …, 8). [fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US] where: Primary load current...
Page 497 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller NOTE Make sure that you configure the parameter Max load current on the voltage controller on the trans- former T to 200 %, as this summation load current is used for the line compensation. Parameter: Max load current •...
Page 498: Limiting Values
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer Parameter: Line drop compensation • Default setting (_:125) Line drop compensation = off For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameters: Parameter: Target voltage rising w1 •...
Page 499: Blockings
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer Parameter: Vmin threshold w1 • Default setting (_:129) Vmin threshold w1 = 105.000 V Parameter: Vmin threshold w2 • Default setting (_:148) Vmin threshold w2 = 105.000 V Parameter: Vmax threshold w1 •...
Page 500: Parallel Control
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Additional Pararmeters for Three-Winding Transformers and for Grid Coupling Transformers Parameter: V< Threshold w1 • Default setting (_:136) V< Threshold w1 = 90.000 V Parameter: V< Threshold w2 • Default setting (_:150) V< Threshold w2 = 90.000 V You can find the parameter and information lists in chapter 6.9.5 Settings.
Page 501: Settings
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller • Default setting (_:14011:148) VT supervision time delay = 10 s With the VT supervision time delay parameter, you set the time for which exceeding the voltage supervision threshold does not lead to a blocking. Parameter: Circul.
Page 502 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:14011:112 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 1 _:14011:157 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 2 _:14011:158 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 3 _:14011:159...
Page 503 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:14011:147 90V V.contr.2w:VT 0.5 % to 10.0 % 10.0 % supervision threshold _:14011:148 90V V.contr.2w:VT 1 s to 600 s 10 s supervision time delay • _:14011:149 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. •...
Page 504 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:14011:140 90V V.contr.2w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s delay • _:14011:141 90V V.contr.2w:I< • Blocking _:14011:142 90V V.contr.2w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 % Threshold _:14011:143 90V V.contr.2w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s delay...
Page 505 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:15601:167 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 4 w1 _:15601:146 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 1 w2 _:15601:168 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V voltage 2 w2...
Page 506 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:15601:154 90V V.contr.3w:X line -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω _:15601:155 90V V.contr.3w:R line 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω _:15601:156 90V V.contr.3w:X line -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω...
Page 507 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Grid Coupling Transformer Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Winding 1 _:2311:101 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A _:2311:103 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV Winding 2 _:2311:102 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A _:2311:104...
Page 508 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:16351:113 90V V.contr.gc:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 % width • _:16351:114 90V V.contr.gc:T1 char- Linear Linear • acteristic Inverse _:16351:115 90V V.contr.gc:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s _:16351:116 90V V.contr.gc:T1...
Page 509: Information List
Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:16351:148 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V threshold w2 _:16351:130 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s time delay • _:16351:131 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax • limiting _:16351:132 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax...
Page 510 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Information Data Class Type (Type) _:14011:52 90V V.contr.2w:Behavior _:14011:301 90V V.contr.2w:End Higher pos. Auto _:14011:302 90V V.contr.2w:End Lower pos. Auto _:14011:326 90V V.contr.2w:Cmd. with feedback _:14011:329 90V V.contr.2w:Block auto _:14011:312 90V V.contr.2w:Operating mode _:14011:305 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth > _:14011:306 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth <...
Page 511 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Information Data Class Type (Type) _:14011:362 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel-operation error Three-Winding Transformer Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:2311:52 General:Behavior _:2311:53 General:Health 90V V.contr.3w _:15601:81 90V V.contr.3w:>Block _:15601:85 90V V.contr.3w:>Reset min./max. _:15601:53 90V V.contr.3w:Health _:15601:54 90V V.contr.3w:Inactive _:15601:52 90V V.contr.3w:Behavior _:15601:301...
Page 512 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Information Data Class Type (Type) _:15601:358 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w1 _:15601:359 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 2 w1 _:15601:360 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 3 w1 _:15601:361 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 4 w1 _:15601:362 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w2 _:15601:363 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 2 w2 _:15601:364...
Page 513 Control Functions 6.9 Voltage Controller Information Data Class Type (Type) _:16351:318 90V V.contr.gc:I> Blocking _:16351:319 90V V.contr.gc:I< Blocking _:16351:320 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w1 _:16351:321 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w2 _:16351:322 90V V.contr.gc:ΔV act. _:16351:323 90V V.contr.gc:I load w1 _:16351:324 90V V.contr.gc:I load w2 _:16351:325 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 1 _:16351:326 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 2 _:16351:327...
Page 514 SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 515: Protection And Automation Functions
Protection and Automation Functions Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Automatic Reclosing Function External Trip Initiation 3-Pole Overcurrent Protection, Phases Overcurrent Protection, Ground Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 7.12...
Page 516: Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
Page 517: Function Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-2 Function Logic Overview Function Description 7.1.3 The Circuit-breaker failure protection function is started by device-internal protection functions and/or exter- nally (via a binary input or an interface, such as GOOSE). Internal Start By default, each device-internal protection stage, that has to control the local circuit breaker, starts the circuit- breaker failure protection.
Page 518 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loanwint-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-3 Internal Start of the 3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function [lointsta-160611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-4 Internal Start of the 1/3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function External Start The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1- channel or 2-channel signal.
Page 519 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loanwext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-5 Configuration of the External Start of the 3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function [loanwext-180713-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-6 Configuration of the External Start of the 1/3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function In 1-channel operation, the start for the 3-pole circuit breaker is initiated with the binary input signal >Start only.
Page 520 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of the settable supervision time for the starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
Page 521 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loexlsvs-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-8 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic of the 1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker 1-Pole or Multi-Pole Start (with 1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker) Based on the starting signals, it is determined whether it is a 1-pole or a multi-pole start (see Figure 7-9).
Page 522 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loveranw-100311-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-9 Processing the Starting Signals of the CBFP Current-Flow Criterion The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. A circuit- breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value and a plausibility current exceeds the associated threshold value at the same time.
Page 523 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [lostrom1-030211-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 7-10 Current-Flow Criterion Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the circuit-breaker position. The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the Circuit-breaker function block) is used to deter- mine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
Page 524 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [lokriter-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-11 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion for the 3-Pole Circuit Breaker [lohikols-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-12 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion for the 1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker Pickup/Dropout After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Page 525 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection above the set threshold values has been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion becomes effective. The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the circuit breaker (or the CB pole with the 1/3-pole circuit breaker) to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
Page 526 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loanregu-170611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-14 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function (1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker) Delay/Tripping In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the settable delay T1.
Page 527 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde- pendent of the identically named global parameter that is set in the Device settings.
Page 528: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [lo-bbp-verzau-1ph.vsd, 5, en_US] Figure 7-16 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function (1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker) 7.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Figure 7-17 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the 3-pole CBFP function, Figure 7-18 gives this overview for the 1/3-pole function.
Page 529 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loextpol-021112-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-17 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Start, Tripping Repetition and 3-Pole Tripping (T2) SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 530 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection [loschema-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-18 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2) Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function) Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit- breaker interaction entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device).
Page 531 There can be operating conditions under which the current flow is higher than the pickup value. To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel start. The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit is available 1 channel for starting the CBFP.
Page 532 NOTE Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an...
Page 533 Description If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed, Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite- rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the current flow is the most reliable criterion.
Page 534 Parameter: Threshold I2 dir. release Recommended setting value (_:123)Threshold I2 dir. release = approx. 0.5 I2 This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom- mends setting the threshold to half the permitted negative-sequence current (I2 ) to achieve a fast fault clearing in case of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Page 535 The following settings make sense: • If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st trip circuit is not detected.
Page 536 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz) Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period Subtotal 65 ms Security Factor 2 Total (time T1) 130 ms EXAMPLE (1/3-Pole Circuit Breaker) Different T1 Times, Depending on whether the Start Was 1-Pole or 3-Pole: The protection tripping can be 1-pole.
Page 537: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Parameter: Minimum operate time • Default setting (3-pole circuit breaker) (_:112) Minimum operate time = - • Default setting (1/3-pole circuit breaker) (_:115) Minimum operate time = - The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function. CAUTION Do not set a time that is too short.
Page 538 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:108 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • after T1 start T2 after T1 (3-pole circuit • parallel start T2, T1 breaker) • _:103 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB • aux.cont.
Page 539: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:114 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s for 1-pole trip (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:115 50BF Ad.CBF #:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s operate time (1/3-pole...
Page 540 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Information Data Class Type (Type) _:504 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start pole C (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:506 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release 3-pole (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:505 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release 1-pole (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:82 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function _:507 50BF Ad.CBF #:>CB defect _:500...
Page 541 Protection and Automation Functions 7.1 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Information Data Class Type (Type) _:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release 1p.' (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. (3-pole circuit breaker) _:311 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI release 3p (1/3-pole circuit breaker) _:312...
Page 542: Automatic Reclosing Function
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Automatic Reclosing Function Overview of Functions 7.2.1 The Automatic reclosing function: • Automatically closes overhead lines after arc short-circuits • Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an arc short-circuit exists here •...
Page 543 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can add and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5. [dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-21 Structure/Embedding of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time...
Page 544: Cooperation Of The Automatic Reclosing Function And Protection Functions
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-24 Function Control for the Automatic Reclosing Function Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions 7.2.3 The Automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way: •...
Page 545 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [loawesig-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-25 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 7-25.
Page 546: Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [scawe6md-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-26 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing Function in DIGSI 5 If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix, this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
Page 547 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function reclosing must be started with the operate indications. Additionally, the general pickup must also be consid- ered. With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen.
Page 548 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
Page 549: Structure Of The Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
Page 550: Input Logic For Operating Modes With Tripping
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-31 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Block Diagram of Automatic Reclosing 7.2.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping The operate indications are used as starting signals. For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup messages.
Page 551: Input Logic For Operating Modes With Pickup
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Applications with 3-Pole Tripping For applications with only 3-pole tripping options, the internal operate indications are always 3-pole. For external starts, there is a binary input, which signalizes a 3-pole tripping of the external protection device. The outputs of the input logic signalize that the reclosing start has occurred through a 3-pole operate indica- tion.
Page 552: Start
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications. During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time.
Page 553: Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Transition to the Dead-Time State The transition of the automatic reclosing function to the dead-time state occurs for: • Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active •...
Page 554 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic aft. 1-pole trip reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle , you can block the asso- ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
Page 555: Cycle Control With Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-35 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time 7.2.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the action time(s).
Page 556 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Action Time If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are released through the parameter Start from idle state allow.
Page 557: Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-36 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time 7.2.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 7-37, the cycle control for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated.
Page 558: Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function tive automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle , you can block the associated automatic reclosing cycle. For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func- tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping ( AR only after 1p.
Page 559: Stage Release
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input. In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits.
Page 560: Dead Time For Operating Modes With Tripping
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Figure 7-39 shows the tripping stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic reclosing functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time. The cycle number in this state is on 1.
Page 561 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to ∞ (= invalid) avoids an automatic reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead time aft. 1-pole trip is set to ∞ (= invalid). As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 7.2.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time),...
Page 562: Dead Time For Operating Modes With Pickup
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lopauaul-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-41 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With Tripping 7.2.4.12 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup In the dead time function block, the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip command is started.
Page 563 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function There are 4 time stages that can be set differently: • Dead time after 1-phase short circuits • Dead time after 2-phase short circuits • Dead time after 3-phase short circuits • Dead time for evolving faults In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph.
Page 564: Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function 7.2.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time. This may be the case during 1-pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non-switched conductors after this. After 3-pole tripping there may also be evolving faults if the line is fed through a second (non-3-pole) opened circuit breaker, for example, for systems with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Page 565 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see Figure 7-43.
Page 566: Closing Indication And Close Command
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function 7.2.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command After the expiration of the dead time, the Automatic reclosing function will be in the closing state. The closing state can depend on the following influences, see Figure 7-45: •...
Page 567 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Testing the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before Closing For each of the automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a test of the circuit-breaker readiness should occur directly before closing (parameters CB ready check bef.close, Figure 7-46).
Page 568: Reclaim Time
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Close Command As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the auto- matic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic reclosing function.
Page 569: Circuit-Breaker Readiness And Circuit-Breaker Condition
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-48 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the reclaim time 7.2.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition The automatic reclosing function requires the readiness of the circuit breaker for the following purposes, see Figure 7-49: •...
Page 570 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-49 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see Figure 7-50): • Detection of a non-closed circuit breaker before the start: In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, a non-3-pole closed circuit breaker leads to the blocking of the automatic reclosing function, see also chapter...
Page 571: Blockings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lolsuebe-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-50 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision 7.2.4.17 Blockings The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 7-51: • Static blocking •...
Page 572 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Condition Indication No reclosing cycle possible Inactive Recognition due to the following causes: • Automatic reclosing cycle is not set. • Automatic reclosing cycles are set, but all are blocked, for example, via binary input. •...
Page 573 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Condition Indication If the inquiry of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup. the maximum dead-time prolongation expires Blk.by max.d.t.
Page 574: Dead-Line Checking (Dlc) And Reduced Dead Time (Rdt)
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-51 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Blocking Logic in the Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and Dynamic Blocking) 7.2.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) The additional functions Dead-line check (DLC) and Reduced dead time (RDT), are only possible for applica- tions with a voltage-transformer connection.
Page 575 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Both additional functions DLC and RDT are mutually exclusive, because the DLC checks if the value falls below a voltage threshold, while the RDT checks if the value exceeds the voltage threshold. The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.
Page 576: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-52 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check 7.2.4.19 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:6601:1 General:Mode • •...
Page 577 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:6601:102 General:CB ready check • bef. start _:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s aft.succ.cyc. _:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s man.close _:6601:105...
Page 578: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:6571:110 Cycle 1:Synchroch. aft. none none • 3-pole d.t. internal • external _:6571:112 Cycle 1:Intern. synchro- Setting options depend on check with configuration 7.2.4.20 Information List Information Data Class Type...
Page 579 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip _:6601:309 General:In progress _:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running _:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. _:6601:313 General:Evolv.-fault detected _:6601:314 General:RDT CloseCmd indicat. _:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip _:6601:316 General:Dead t.
Page 580: Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (Adt)
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) 7.2.5 7.2.5.1 Description Description It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the other end or ends.
Page 581: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function 7.2.5.2 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:6601:1 General:Mode • • test • _:6601:101 General:79 operating mode with op., w/o act. time with op., with • with op., with act. time act.
Page 582 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup _:6601:503 General:>Blk. with 2-ph pickup _:6601:504 General:>Blk. with 3-ph pickup _:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR _:6601:506 General:>Blk. 3-pole AR _:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start _:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start _:6601:509...
Page 583: Cooperation With External Automatic Reclosing Function
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Information Data Class Type (Type) _:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp _:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry _:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle _:6601:338 General:Block. by protection _:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage _:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles _:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR _:6601:340...
Page 584: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function [loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-54 Connection of an External Automatic Reclosing Function There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
Page 585: Application And Setting Notes For General Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Application and Setting Notes for General Settings 7.2.7 For the automatic reclosing function, there are 3 functions available in the function library. In each circuit- breaker function group, a function from the automatic reclosing function can be used. Configure one of the 3 following function specifications: •...
Page 586 Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole trip- ping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, independent of the type of connection working, is required in the automatic reclosing func- tion cycle.
Page 587 If the circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function reports the static blocking. Siemens recommends using this setting. Note: The presetting of this parameter does not correspond with the recom- mended setting for operation. The automatic reclosing function would other- wise be blocked with a non-available circuit breaker-ready-signal.
Page 588 • If during a 1-pole the automatic reclosing function cycle the supervision of the circuit-breaker pole recognizes an implausible condition. Siemens recommends using this setting. The automatic reclosing function does not create 3-pole tripping. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual...
Page 589 For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is adequately interconnected. If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better suitable.
Page 590 For the subfunction Dead-line check, the surpassing of a voltage threshold is checked. Siemens recommends the setting 0.10 s. Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the following parameters and in the chapters 7.2.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)
Page 591: Application And Setting Notes For 1 Cycle Of The Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Parameter: Dead-line check/reduc.d.t This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time). • Default setting (_:6601:113) Dead-line check/reduc.d.t = without With the Dead-line check/reduc.d.t parameter, you can determine if the automatic reclosing function should work with one of the additional functions Dead-line check DLC or Reduced dead t.
Page 592 Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function Parameter: Start from idle state allow. This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating mode with action time. • Default setting (_:6571:102) Start from idle state allow. = yes With the parameter Start from idle state allow.
Page 593 Siemens recommends this setting, if it is sufficient to check the readiness of the circuit breaker for the entire switching cycle once before the start of a reclosing function, consisting of tripping-reclosing-tripping.
Page 594: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.2 Automatic Reclosing Function With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be carried out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle. If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should be carried out.
Page 595: External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
Protection and Automation Functions 7.3 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole External Trip Initiation 3-Pole Overview of Functions 7.3.1 The External trip initiation function: • Processes any signals from external protection or supervision devices • Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping processing, for example from transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection •...
Page 596: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.3 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole Stage Description 7.3.3 Logic of the Stage [lotrip3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-57 Logic Diagram for the External Trip-Initiation Stage Binary Input Signal >External Trip The binary input signal >External trip starts the Pickup and the Operate delay. Blocking the Stage The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals.
Page 597: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.3 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole Information List 7.3.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) Stage 1 _:901:82 Stage 1:>Block function _:901:501 Stage 1:>External trip _:901:54 Stage 1:Inactive _:901:52 Stage 1:Behavior _:901:53 Stage 1:Health _:901:55 Stage 1:Pickup _:901:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired _:901:57 Stage 1:Operate...
Page 598: Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Overcurrent Protection, Phases Overview of Functions 7.4.1 The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51): • Detects short circuits in electrical equipment • Can be used as backup overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection 7.4.2 Structure of the Function The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups.
Page 599: Filter For Rms Value Gain
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases [dw_ocp_ad with Filter2.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 7-58 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced [dwocpbp1-210113-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-59 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages.
Page 600: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter. Logic [lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US] Figure 7-60 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value is calculated.
Page 601: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled. Parameter Value Description If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set parameter Enable filter = yes. If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter = Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) •...
Page 602: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.4.3.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) Filter _:301 Filter:Iph:A _:302 Filter:Iph:B _:303 Filter:Iph:C Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve 7.4.4 7.4.4.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [loocp3b1-280113-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-61 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) –...
Page 603 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Logic of the Advanced Stage [lo_OCP_Adv_UMZ_StageControl, 1, en_US] Figure 7-62 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 604 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases [loocp3p1-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 7-63 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced Method of measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage) You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 605 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati- cally used. NOTE When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
Page 606: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 607 Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value. Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
Page 608 Default setting (_:661:101) Dropout delay = 0.00 s This parameter is not visible in the basic stage. Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast as possible. You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together with an electromechanical relay.
Page 609: Settings
Parameter Value Description The stage always operates 3-pole. The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the 6MD85 (generated in the trip logic of the function group Circuit-breaker) is always 3-pole because the device does not support phase-selective tripping. Tripping by the 6MD86 is 1-pole using the 1-/3-pole circuit-breaker. The decision as to which poles of the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command control becomes involved.
Page 610 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy • _:661:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • off/n.ready • _:661:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • blocked Dyn.set: AR cycle 1 • _:661:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by •...
Page 611: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:661:17 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A...
Page 612 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Information Data Class Type (Type) _:661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate _:661:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. _:661:63 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. _:661:64 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. _:661:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act _:661:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active _:661:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set.
Page 613: Stage With Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve 7.4.5 7.4.5.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [loocp3b2-280113-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-65 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 614 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Logic of the Advanced Stage [lo_Stage Control, 1, en_US] Figure 7-66 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control [loocp3p2-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 7-67 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 615 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage) If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement. • Normal RMS value • Gained RMS value from the function block Filter If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati- cally used.
Page 616 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage) With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse- time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time. Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage) You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 617: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 618 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s. NOTE If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Page 619 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the low-voltage side of the transformer. The following conditions must be fulfilled: •...
Page 620: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.4.5.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • • test • _:691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:691:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • operate allowed • _:691:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic •...
Page 621 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:691:102 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00 Dyn.set: AR cycle 2 • _:691:30 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • AR cycle 2 • _:691:37 Inverse-T 1:Stage • blocked _:691:15 Inverse-T 1:Threshold...
Page 622: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:691:106 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00 Dyn.set: bin.input • _:691:34 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • binary input • _:691:41 Inverse-T 1:Stage • blocked _:691:19 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A...
Page 623 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases • You can define the characteristic curve as desired. • The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute). User-Defined Characteristic Curve With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30 value pairs of current and time.
Page 624: Application And Setting Notes
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Page 625: Settings
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Page 626 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A...
Page 627 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.set: AR cycle 3 • _:31 User curve #:Effected by • AR cycle 3 • _:38 User curve #:Stage • blocked _:16 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A...
Page 628: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.4.6.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) User curve # _:81 User curve #:>Block stage _:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings _:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. _:54 User curve #:Inactive _:52 User curve #:Behavior _:53...
Page 629: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases [loocp3pha-210812-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 7-71 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi- nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage 7.4.7.2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. •...
Page 630 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Figure 7-72). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function type Advanced. [loocp3dpa-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 7-72 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages: Functionalities...
Page 631 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again.
Page 632 Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the protection stage and its blocking. • AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1) •...
Page 633: Application And Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Protection and Automation Functions 7.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) Parameter: Dynamic settings • Default setting (_:661:26) Dynamic settings = no Parameter Value Description The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or external functions is not necessary. If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent- protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time...
Page 634: Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Overcurrent Protection, Ground Overview of Functions 7.5.1 The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N): • Detects short circuits in electrical equipment • Can be used as backup overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection 7.5.2 Structure of the Function The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups.
Page 635: General Functionality
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground [dwocpga2-060213-01.tif, 5, en_US] Figure 7-76 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced [dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 7-77 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages.
Page 636: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground [loMasValue-201507-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 7-78 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase + IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Page 637: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the IN Measured recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This 3I0 Calculated setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for safety reasons.
Page 638: Stage With Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve 7.5.4 7.5.4.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-79 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 639 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Logic of the Advanced Stage [loocpgn1-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-80 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage) You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 640: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 641 Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value. Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
Page 642: Settings
Recommended setting value (_:751:101) Dropout delay = 0 This parameter is not visible in the basic stage. Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast as possible. You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together with an electromechanical relay.
Page 643 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:751:8 Definite-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental • measurement RMS value comp. _:751:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A...
Page 644 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:751:38 Definite-T 1:Stage • blocked _:751:16 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A...
Page 645 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:752:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • • test • _:752:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:752:26 Definite-T 2:Dynamic • settings • _:752:27 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. •...
Page 646 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:752:15 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A...
Page 647: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.set: bin.input • _:752:34 Definite-T 2:Effected by • binary input • _:752:41 Definite-T 2:Stage • blocked _:752:19 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A...
Page 648: Stage With Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve 7.5.5 7.5.5.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [lo_ocp_gr2, 4, en_US] Figure 7-81 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 649 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Logic of the Advanced Stage [loocpgn2-291112-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-82 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and Advanced Stage) When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed.
Page 650 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value. The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data. Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage) With the parameter Min.
Page 651: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 652: Settings
0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve. This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Page 653 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:2311:9 General:Measured value 3I0 calculated IN measured • IN measured General • _:781:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • • test • _:781:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked •...
Page 654 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:781:37 Inverse-T 1:Stage • blocked _:781:15 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A...
Page 655: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:781:41 Inverse-T 1:Stage • blocked _:781:19 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A...
Page 656 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground • You can define the characteristic curve as desired. • The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute). User-Defined Characteristic Curve With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30 value pairs of current and time.
Page 657: Application And Setting Notes
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Page 658: Settings
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Page 659 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s time delay Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy • _:28 User curve #:Effect. by • AR off/n.ready • _:35 User curve #:Stage •...
Page 660: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:17 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A...
Page 661: Blocking Of The Tripping By Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Information Data Class Type (Type) _:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active _:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup _:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running _:55 User curve #:Pickup _:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired _:57 User curve #:Operate Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection...
Page 662: Influence Of Other Functions Via Dynamic Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Parameter Value Description The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage. Select this setting in the following cases: • In cases where the device is not used on transformers. • In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
Page 663 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground [loocpgnd-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 7-86 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages: Functionalities Priority Automatic reclosing (AREC)
Page 664 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active. The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled.
Page 665 Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection stage and its blocking. • AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1) •...
Page 666: Application And Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Protection and Automation Functions 7.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 7.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) Binary Input Signal: Dynamic settings • Default setting (_:751:26) Dynamic settings = no Parameter Value Description The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or external functions is not necessary.
Page 667: Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Overview of Functions 7.6.1 The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67): • Detects short circuits at electrical equipment • Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection •...
Page 668: Application And Setting Notes
8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions). Parameter Value Description The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom- mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.
Page 669: Stage With Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve 7.6.4 7.6.4.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [lodocg6b-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-91 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 670 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Logic of the Advanced Stage [lodocp31-141013, 1, en_US] Figure 7-92 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced Directional Mode (Basic and Advanced Stage) You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc- tion.
Page 671 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the basic stage generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage, the response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter.
Page 672: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 673 Recommended setting value (_:8131:101) Dropout delay = 0 s This parameter is not visible in the basic stage. Siemens recommends using this setting value, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as fast as possible. You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together with an electromechanical relay.
Page 674: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.6.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:2311:101 General:Emergency • mode caused by main prot. • caused by binary input _:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °...
Page 675 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:8131:36 Definite-T 1:Stage • blocked _:8131:14 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 676 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.s: Cold load PU • _:8131:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • cold-load pickup • _:8131:40 Definite-T 1:Stage • blocked _:8131:18 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A...
Page 677 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:8132:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 678 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:8132:16 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 679: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 7.6.4.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode _:2311:501 General:>Test of direction _:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. _:2311:301 General:Test direction Group indicat. _:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup _:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate Definite-T 1 _:8131:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage...
Page 680: Stage With Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Information Data Class Type (Type) _:8132:300 Definite-T 2:Direction _:8132:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired _:8132:57 Definite-T 2:Operate 7.6.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve 7.6.5.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [lodoci6b-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-93 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual...
Page 681 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Logic of the Advanced Stage [lodocp33-121013, 2, en_US] Figure 7-94 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced Directional Mode (Basic and Advanced Stage) You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc- tion.
Page 682 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage, the response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the function does not pick up.
Page 683: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 684 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve. This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Page 685: Settings
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve. This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Page 686 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • _:8341:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • • test • _:8341:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:8341:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional forward forward • mode reverse •...
Page 687 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:8341:14 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 688: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:8341:18 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 689: Stage With User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Information Data Class Type (Type) _:8161:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running _:8161:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup _:8161:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction _:8161:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired _:8161:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate 7.6.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve 7.6.6.1 Description The structure of this stage is identical to that of the advanced stage with directional inverse-time characteristic curve...
Page 690: Application And Setting Notes
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Page 691: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter. NOTE The value pairs must be entered in continuous order. 7.6.6.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General •...
Page 692 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:14 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 693: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:18 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 694: Direction Determination
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Direction Determination 7.6.7 7.6.7.1 Description General Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements involved perform direction determination independently.
Page 695 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases B, C – – – – A, C – – – – A, B, Gnd – – B, C, Gnd – – A, C, Gnd – – A, B, C – –...
Page 696: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases [dwdocp34-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-99 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element Direction Determination for Test Purposes If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages.
Page 697: Influence Of Other Functions Via Dynamic Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases Application φsh Setting typical Rotation angle of ref. volt. Range 60 to 30 for PP faults Selected: 45 Range 60 to 30 for PP faults Selected: 45 Input signal: >Test of direction If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages.
Page 698: Application Notes For Directional Comparison Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases [dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-100 Parallel Line with Transformers Legend for Figure 7-100 Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set Stage: Non-directional stage Grading time Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection 7.6.10 The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends.
Page 699 Protection and Automation Functions 7.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases [dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-101 Selectivity through Directional Comparison Protection Legend for Figure 7-101 Stage ▶: Stage is set in the forward direction; stage 1 is instantaneous, stage 2 is graded ▶, ◀: If a threshold value is exceeded, the stage indicates the direction (forward or reverse) If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-...
Page 700: Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Overview of Functions 7.7.1 The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 67N): • Detects short circuits to ground affecting electric equipment • Ensures selective ground-fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end •...
Page 701 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground [dwrdirad-300913, 3, en_US] Figure 7-102 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced [dwrdirba-300913, 2, en_US] Figure 7-103 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic If the following listed device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages.
Page 702: General Functionality
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground General Functionality 7.7.3 7.7.3.1 Measured-Value Selection Logic The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated. [loMasValue-201505-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 7-104 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase + IN-separate.
Page 703: Direction Determination
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 7.7.3.2 Direction Determination Logic of Direction Determination The following figure represents the logic of the direction determination. It applies to all types of stages. [lodirdet-280812-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-105 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination Measurand for the Direction Determination With the parameter Polarization with you define whether the direction determination is calculated with the zero-sequence components 3I0 and V0 or with the negative-sequence components I2 and V2, which are...
Page 704 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground into account, the reference voltage V0 can be rotated through an adjustable angle (parameter Rotation angle of ref. volt. ). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit current -3I0.
Page 705: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground [dwforrev-281013, 2, en_US] Figure 7-108 Forward/Reverse Characteristic of the Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence Values The method works in the same way as for zero-sequence values. Instead of 3I0 and V0, the negative-sequence values I2 and V2 are used for determining the direction.
Page 706 Maximum operational measured value of zero-sequence voltage V0 = 0.5 Vsec Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 1.5 ⋅ 0.5 V = 0.75 Vsec If you have no information about maximum operational unbalance, Siemens recommends using the default setting. Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt. / Forward section +/- •...
Page 707: Settings
Description Select zero sequence to determine the direction via the zero-sequence zero sequence components V0 and 3I0. Siemens recommends using the zero-sequence components for the direction determination. Select negative sequence to determine the direction via the negative- negative sequence sequence components V2 and I2.
Page 708: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 7.7.3.5 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:2311:501 General:>Test of direction _:2311:352 General:Test direction _:2311:351 General:Phi(I,V) Stage Control 7.7.4 7.7.4.1 Description Logic The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages. [lostacon-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-109 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control...
Page 709 Parameter Value Description The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring- voltage failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring- voltage failure occurs. The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a meas- uring-voltage failure is detected.
Page 710: Stage With Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve 7.7.5 7.7.5.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [lodirovb-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-110 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 711 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Logic of the Advanced Stage [lodirova-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-111 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage) The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault. Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence current is measured or calculated.
Page 712 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Table 7-6 Threshold Setting Range Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range Measuring Point (Secondary) I-3ph 3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A 4 * Measurement...
Page 713: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 714 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal • Default setting (_:4861:104) Directional comparison = no • Default setting (_:4861:106) Release via input signal= no The parameters Directional comparison and Release via input signal are not visible for the basic stage.
Page 715: Settings
Recommended setting value (_:4861:101) Dropout delay = 0 s This parameter is not visible for the basic stage. Siemens recommends using the dropout delay of 0 s, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as fast as possible.
Page 716 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:4861:8 Definite-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental • measurement RMS value comp. • _:4861:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • comparison • _:4861:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • input signal •...
Page 717 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:4861:15 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 718: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.set: bin.input • _:4861:34 Definite-T 1:Effected by • binary input • _:4861:41 Definite-T 1:Stage • blocked _:4861:19 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A...
Page 719: Stage With Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve 7.7.6 7.7.6.1 Description Logic of the Basic Stage [lodiinvb-280812-02.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-112 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 720 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Logic of the Advanced Stage [lodiinva-280812-02.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-113 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage) The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault. Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence current is measured or calculated.
Page 721 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Table 7-7 Threshold Setting Range Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range Measuring Point I-3ph (Secondary) 3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A 4 * Measurement...
Page 722 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground [DwMinTime_20140708-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 7-114 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage) With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse- time delay.
Page 723: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 724 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Parameter Value Description If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the >Release delay & op. input signal become avail- able.
Page 725 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve. This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Page 726: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1 (default setting). Parameter: Reset • Default setting (_:4891:131) Reset = disk emulation You can use the Reset parameter setting to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout characteristic curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Page 727 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy • _:4891:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • off/n.ready • _:4891:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • blocked Dyn.set: AR cycle 1 • _:4891:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by •...
Page 728: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:4891:17 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 729 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Information Data Class Type (Type) _:4891:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active _:4891:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active _:4891:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup _:4891:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running _:4891:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup _:4891:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction _:4891:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired _:4891:57...
Page 730: Stage With Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection With Logarithmic-Inverse Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse 7.7.7 Characteristic Curve 7.7.7.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lodiloin-280812-02.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-115 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection –...
Page 731 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Operate Curve If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value T calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/ .
Page 732: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 7.7.7.2 Application and Setting Notes Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse- time delay according to IEC and ANSI (advanced function type) (see chapter 7.7.6.1 Description).
Page 733: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect. Settings 7.7.7.3 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General • Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • • test • Log.-inv.-T #:Operate &...
Page 734 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:14 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 735: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:18 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 736: Stage With Knee-Point Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve 7.7.8 7.7.8.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lodilokn-280812-02.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-117 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Overcurrent Protec- tion, Ground Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protec- tion –...
Page 737: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Operate Curve If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value T calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the threshold value. An integrator accumulates the value .
Page 738: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Parameter: Time dial • Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 0.2 You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the operate curve in the time direction. General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application. Parameter: Knee-point •...
Page 739: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Log.inv.T KP #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 740: Stage With User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve 7.7.9 7.7.9.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lodirusr-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-119 Logic Diagram of the Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection, Ground This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see chapter 7.7.6.1 Description).
Page 741: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground User-Defined Characteristic Curve With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from these values.
Page 742: Settings
The setting follows the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Page 743 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • User curve #:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:113 User curve #:Directional forward forward • mode reverse • User curve #:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental •...
Page 744 Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:15 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 745: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:19 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 746: Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Function Overview 7.8.1 The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function (ANSI 50N/51N): • Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding • Can operate as sensitive tank leakage protection •...
Page 747 Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase [dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-121 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Advanced [dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-122 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Basic If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.
Page 748: Stage With Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve 7.8.3 7.8.3.1 Description Logic of a Stage [loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-123 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Method of measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 749: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 750: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 7.8.3.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Definite-T 1 • _:12661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • • test • _:12661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:12661:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • inrush curr. detect. •...
Page 751 Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Information Data Class Type (Type) _:12661:53 Definite-T 1:Health _:12661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate _:12661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup _:12661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired _:12661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate Definite-T 2 _:12662:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage _:12662:500 Definite-T 2:>Block delay & op. _:12662:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive _:12662:52...
Page 752: Stage With Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve 7.8.4 7.8.4.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-124 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase) Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed.
Page 753: Application And Setting Notes
(standard method) or the calculated RMS value. Parameter Value Description Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 754: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Parameter Value Description Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction.
Page 755: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:12691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental • measurement RMS value comp. _:12691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A...
Page 756: Application And Setting Notes
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Page 757: Settings
The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize. Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Page 758: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.8 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:110 User curve #:Reset instantaneous disk emulation • disk emulation _:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00 7.8.5.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) User curve #...
Page 759: Group Indications Of Overcurrent Protection Functions
Protection and Automation Functions 7.9 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions Description 7.9.1 The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate indications of the following functions: • Overcurrent protection, phases •...
Page 760: Inrush-Current Detection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection Overview of Functions 7.10.1 The function Inrush-current detection • Recognizes an inrush process on transformers • Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on •...
Page 761 Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection [loinru02-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-128 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection Harmonic Analysis For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents I , and I and the quotient I 2nd harm...
Page 762 Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection [loinru10-040912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-129 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period) CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis) The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase currents show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued.
Page 763 Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection [loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-131 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period) Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA method.
Page 764: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection [loinru12-060912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-132 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection Application and Setting Notes 7.10.4 Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax • Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax, you can specify at which current the inrush-current detection is blocked internally.
Page 765: Settings
Harmonic analysis process activated. Harmonic analysis process deactivated. NOTE Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values. Parameter: 2nd harmonic content • Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 % With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic anal- ysis function.
Page 766: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.10 Inrush-Current Detection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 767: Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping Overview of Functions 7.11.1 The Instantaneous high-current tripping function has the following tasks: • Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is closed.
Page 768: Standard Release Procedure
Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping Standard Release Procedure 7.11.3 Logic [lohlore3-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-134 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method Activation Using the Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released. •...
Page 769: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active. Method of Measurement, Threshold Value The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement. • Measurement of the fundamental component: This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically.
Page 770: Release Procedure Via Protection Interface
Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I" flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 V [foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US] With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting value results: [foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US] If short-circuit currents exceed 1496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be protected.
Page 771 Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping Logic [lohinre3-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-135 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection Interface Release If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for further information, see chapter 5.8.1 Overview of Functions):...
Page 772: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping • Measurement of the fundamental component: This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo- nent is compared with the set threshold.
Page 773 Protection and Automation Functions 7.11 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping Information Data Class Type (Type) _:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate Standard 1 _:3901:500 Standard 1:>release _:3901:81 Standard 1:>Block stage _:3901:54 Standard 1:Inactive _:3901:52 Standard 1:Behavior _:3901:53 Standard 1:Health _:3901:300 Standard 1:Rel. by CB switch on _:3901:55 Standard 1:Pickup _:3901:57...
Page 774: Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection Overview of Functions 7.12.1 The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V) function: • Detects short circuits affecting electric equipment • Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased depending on the fault voltage •...
Page 775: Stage Description Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection Stage Description Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent 7.12.3 7.12.3.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lovoldep-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-137 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent Method of Measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 776 Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection • Measurement of the fundamental comp.: This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically. • Measurement of the RMS value: This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value.
Page 777: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char- acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve.
Page 778 Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks fundamental comp. are to be suppressed. Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Page 779: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param- eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
Page 780: Stage Description Voltage-Independent Overcurrent Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection Stage Description Voltage-Independent Overcurrent Protection 7.12.4 7.12.4.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lovolrel-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-139 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see chapter 7.12.3.1 Description).
Page 781: Application And Setting Notes
The overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected. The overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as correct operation of the stage cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
Page 782: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.12 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection 7.12.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting V-release # • V-release #:Mode • • test • V-release #:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:10 V-release #:Blk. by • meas.-volt. failure • _:27 V-release #:Blk.
Page 783: Overvoltage Protection With 3-Phase Voltage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Overview of Functions 7.13.1 The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to: • Monitor the permissible voltage range • Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over- voltage •...
Page 784: Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Description 7.13.3 Logic of the Stage [lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 7-141 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Method of Measurement Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp. or the RMS value.
Page 785: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient fundamental comp. voltage peaks. Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Page 786 1 out of 3 range. Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3). Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power 3 out of 3 system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Page 787: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Stage Setting Values 1.5 V 0.1 s to 0.2 s rated 7.13.5 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Definite-T 1 • _:181:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • • test • _:181:2 Definite-T 1:Operate &...
Page 788 Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Information Data Class Type (Type) _:181:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive _:181:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior _:181:53 Definite-T 1:Health _:181:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup _:181:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB _:181:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC _:181:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA _:181:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired _:181:57...
Page 789: Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Description 7.13.7 Logic of the Stage [lo3phinv, 2, en_US] Figure 7-142 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Method of Measurement Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp. or the RMS value .
Page 790 Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Pickup Mode With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over- voltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Page 791: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient fundamental comp. voltage peaks. Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Page 792 With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default setting. Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.
Page 793: Settings
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom- mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens recommends to keep the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.
Page 794 Protection and Automation Functions 7.13 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Information Data Class Type (Type) _:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB _:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC _:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA _:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired _:57 Inverse-T #:Operate SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 795: Overvoltage Protection With Positive-Sequence Voltage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage Overview of Functions 7.14.1 The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to: • Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages • Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
Page 796: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage Stage Description 7.14.3 Logic of a Stage [logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-145 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage Method of Measurement The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Page 797: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage Parameter: Dropout ratio • Recommended setting value (_:211:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95 The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example. General Notes If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay.
Page 798 Protection and Automation Functions 7.14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage Information Data Class Type (Type) _:211:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired _:211:57 Stage 1:Operate Stage 2 _:212:81 Stage 2:>Block stage _:212:54 Stage 2:Inactive _:212:52 Stage 2:Behavior _:212:53 Stage 2:Health _:212:55 Stage 2:Pickup _:212:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired _:212:57...
Page 799: Overvoltage Protection With Any Voltage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage Overview of Functions 7.15.1 The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is intended for special applications. Structure of the Function 7.15.2 The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
Page 800: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage Stage Description 7.15.3 Logic of a Stage [louxovpr-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-147 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage NOTE If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param- eter Measured value is not visible.
Page 801: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient fundamental comp. voltage peaks. Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Page 802 Protection and Automation Functions 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage NOTE From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a later version: •...
Page 803: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage Settings 7.15.5 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Stage 1 • _:391:1 Stage 1:Mode • • test • _:391:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • blocked • _:391:9 Stage 1:Measured value VA measured VA measured •...
Page 804 Protection and Automation Functions 7.15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage Information Data Class Type (Type) _:391:54 Stage 1:Inactive _:391:52 Stage 1:Behavior _:391:53 Stage 1:Health _:391:55 Stage 1:Pickup _:391:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired _:391:57 Stage 1:Operate Stage 2 _:392:81 Stage 2:>Block stage _:392:54 Stage 2:Inactive _:392:52...
Page 805: Undervoltage Protection With 3-Phase Voltage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Overview of Functions 7.16.1 The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27): • Monitors the permissible voltage range • Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under- voltage •...
Page 806: Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Description 7.16.3 Logic of the Stage [louvp3ph-140611-01_stagecontrol.vsd, 2, en_US] Figure 7-149 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 807 Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage [louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-150 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Method of Measurement With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending on the application.
Page 808: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Pickup Mode With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold- value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Page 809: Settings
1 out of 3 range. Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3). Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power 3 out of 3 system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Page 810: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:421:8 Definite-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental • measurement RMS value comp. • _:421:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode 1 out of 3 1 out of 3 •...
Page 811: Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Information Data Class Type (Type) _:421:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB _:421:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC _:421:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA _:421:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired _:421:57 Definite-T 1:Operate Definite-T 2 _:422:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage _:422:54...
Page 812 Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage [lo_UVP3ph_In, 4, en_US] Figure 7-152 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Method of Measurement With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
Page 813 Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Measured Value With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages , and V , or the phase-to-ground voltages V , and V If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have picked up.
Page 814 Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure: [dwUVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US] Figure 7-153 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection Pickup Delay The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
Page 815: Application And Setting Notes
1 out of 3 range. Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3). Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power 3 out of 3 system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Page 816: Settings
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom- mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.
Page 817: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.16 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode 1 out of 3 1 out of 3 • 3 out of 3 • _:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay • Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V...
Page 818: Undervoltage Protection With Any Voltage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage Overview of Functions 7.17.1 The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is intended for special applications. Structure of the Function 7.17.2 The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
Page 819: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage Stage Description 7.17.3 Logic of a Stage [louvpuxx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-155 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage NOTE If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param- eter Measured value is not visible.
Page 820: Application And Setting Notes
Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient fundamental comp. voltage peaks. Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting. Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics RMS value into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Page 821 Protection and Automation Functions 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage • Measured phase-to-phase voltage V (VAB measured) • Measured phase-to-phase voltage V (VBC measured) • Measured phase-to-phase voltage V (VCA measured) • Calculated phase-to-phase voltage V (VAB calculated) • Calculated phase-to-phase voltage V (VBC calculated) •...
Page 822: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage Parameter Value Description Because of the application, it makes sense that the stage is only active (that is, not blocked) when a certain current flow is present (see note). Current flow monitoring does not make sense for the application. NOTE Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the current associated with the voltage.
Page 823: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:572:9 Stage 2:Measured value VA measured VA measured • VB measured • VC measured • VAB measured • VBC measured • VCA measured •...
Page 824: Overfrequency Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.18 Overfrequency Protection 7.18 Overfrequency Protection Overview of Functions 7.18.1 The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O): • Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines • Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications • Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical •...
Page 825: Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.18 Overfrequency Protection Overfrequency-Protection Stage 7.18.3 Logic of a Stage [lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-157 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage Frequency-Measurement Method Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency- measurement methods.
Page 826: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.18 Overfrequency Protection Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed. Functional Measured Value The angle-difference method provides the following measured value: Measured Value...
Page 827: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.18 Overfrequency Protection When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value. Parameter: Dropout differential •...
Page 828: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.18 Overfrequency Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:32:3 Stage 2:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 1.00 Hz _:32:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 5.00 s Information List 7.18.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) General...
Page 829: Underfrequency Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.19 Underfrequency Protection 7.19 Underfrequency Protection Overview of Functions 7.19.1 The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to: • Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines • Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications •...
Page 830: Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.19 Underfrequency Protection Underfrequency-Protection Stage 7.19.3 Logic of a Stage [lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-159 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage Frequency-Measurement Method Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency- measurement methods.
Page 831: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.19 Underfrequency Protection Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed. Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible.
Page 832: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.19 Underfrequency Protection if the pickup value (parameter Threshold) of the stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage will drop off at 49.9 Hz. Setting example of the underfrequency protection for generators Underfrequency protection provides an additional protection for the turbine.
Page 833: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.19 Underfrequency Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:62:3 Stage 2:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 1.00 Hz _:62:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 10.00 s Stage 3 • _:63:1 Stage 3:Mode •...
Page 834: Underfrequency Load Shedding
Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding Overview of Functions 7.20.1 The Underfrequency load shedding function: • Detects underfrequencies in the electrical power systems • Switches off the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that consume active power to stabilize the frequency •...
Page 835: General Functionality
Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding General Functionality 7.20.3 7.20.3.1 Description Logic [lo_UFLS_General functionality, 1, en_US] Figure 7-161 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality n means the number of the protection stage. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 836 Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding Measurands The general functionality requires the following input measurands: • Positive-sequence voltage V1 • Positive-sequence current I1 • Positive-sequence system apparent power S1 • Positive-sequence system active power P1 • Frequency S1 and P1 are both calculated from V1 and I1. The frequency is calculated from V1. The frequency and the frequency change rate df/dt are calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
Page 837 Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding [dw_load shedding_Power crit.<0, 1, en_US] Figure 7-162 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0 [dw_load shedding_Power crit.>0, 1, en_US] Figure 7-163 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) > 0 The power criterion contains the check of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion. You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter.
Page 838: Application And Setting Notes
If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all protection stages are blocked. The Minimum voltage parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated voltage of the connected voltage measuring point. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Parameter: Positive power direction •...
Page 839 Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding The following figure shows 2 application scenarios of protection devices with the Underfrequency load shed- ding function. [dw_UFLS_positive power direction, 1, en_US] Figure 7-164 Application Scenarios Dotted arrow: Standard forward direction of the protection functionality Solid arrow: Positive active-power flow direction The standard forward direction of the protection functionality is from the busbar to the protected object which...
Page 840 If a feeder can deliver active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar can deliver active power to the high-voltage busbar, Siemens recommends using the power criterion to exclude the feeder or the medium-voltage busbar from being shed under this condition. If a feeder or the medium- voltage busbar is always consuming active power, the power criterion is not required.
Page 841: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding The default setting is a reasonable value. Siemens recommends using the default setting. 7.20.4 Stage Description 7.20.4.1 Description Logic of the Stage [lo_load shedding_stage, 1, en_US] Figure 7-165 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency Load Shedding Stage...
Page 842 Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding If the Pickup signal is maintained during the Operate delay time, an Operate indication is issued. Exclusive Stage Activation A load-shedding schema defines in which order feeders (power consumers) are disconnected. To not discrimi- nate power consumers, this order is changed regularly.
Page 843: Application And Setting Notes
(approx. 10 ms to 30 ms) plus the 6 times measuring repetition of 60 ms, which is 70 ms to 90 ms in total. In order to avoid a wrong pickup in case of a phase jump, Siemens recommends setting the value of the f< stabilization counter parameter not below 5.
Page 844: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding Settings 7.20.5 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting General _:18121:101 General:Minimum 0.300 p.u. to 0.900 p.u. 0.700 p.u. voltage • _:18121:103 General:Power criterion • _:18121:104 General:Min. current 0.020 p.u. to 0.200 p.u. 0.050 p.u.
Page 845 Protection and Automation Functions 7.20 Underfrequency Load Shedding Information Data Class Type (Type) Group indicat. _:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup _:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate Stage 1 _:18151:81 Stage 1:>Block stage _:18151:500 Stage 1:>Block delay & op. _:18151:502 Stage 1:>Exclusive activation _:18151:347 Stage 1:Exclusive activation _:18151:54 Stage 1:Inactive _:18151:52...
Page 846: Rate Of Frequency Change Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection Overview of Functions 7.21.1 The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to: • Detect a frequency change quickly • Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed active power •...
Page 847: Application And Setting Notes
For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data. The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual...
Page 848: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non- sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value. 7.21.4 Stage Description 7.21.4.1...
Page 849: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 7.21.4.2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Threshold • Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.000 Hz/s The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases, a network analysis will be necessary.
Page 850: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection NOTE In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage- stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction. Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func- tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up.
Page 851 Protection and Automation Functions 7.21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection Information Data Class Type (Type) _:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior _:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health _:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup _:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired _:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate df/dt rising1 _:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage _:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive _:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior _:13201:53...
Page 852: Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase Overview of Functions 7.22.1 The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to: • Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold •...
Page 853: Active Power Stage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase [lo_GPP operate indication logical comb, 2, en_US] Figure 7-170 Logical Combination of Operate Indications in CFC 7.22.3 Active Power Stage Logic of a Stage [lo_3-phase active power, 2, en_US] Figure 7-171 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<) Measured Value The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping...
Page 854 Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac- teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini- tion of the signs.
Page 855: Reactive Power Stage
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase Reactive Power Stage 7.22.4 Logic of a Stage [lo_3phase reactive power, 2, en_US] Figure 7-173 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<) Measured Value The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping stage.
Page 856: Application Example
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase [dw_tilt-power reactive power, 2, en_US] Figure 7-174 Tilt-Power Characteristic Pickup The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup. Dropout Delay A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold.
Page 857: Setting Notes For The Active Power Stage
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:105) Measured value = positive seq. power The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power. Parameter: Threshold • Recommended setting value (_:6271:3) Threshold = 0 % The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the active power stage.
Page 858: Setting Notes For The Reactive Power Stage
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:105) Measured value = positive seq. power The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power. Parameter: Threshold • Recommended setting value (_:6331:3) Threshold = 0 % The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage.
Page 859: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase Parameter: Tilt power characteristic • Recommended setting value (_:6331:103) Tilt power characteristic = +20° The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the example (see Figure 7-175), the power characteristic has a tilt of 20°.
Page 860: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:6271:7 Power P< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s _:6271:6 Power P< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s Power Q> 1 •...
Page 861 Protection and Automation Functions 7.22 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase Information Data Class Type (Type) _:6271:54 Power P< 1:Inactive _:6271:52 Power P< 1:Behavior _:6271:53 Power P< 1:Health _:6271:55 Power P< 1:Pickup _:6271:56 Power P< 1:Operate delay expired _:6271:57 Power P< 1:Operate Power Q>...
Page 862: Phase-Sequence Switchover
Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover Overview of Functions 7.23.1 The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi- sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section. The phase sequence is set via parameters.
Page 863 Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover • With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal , you change over the phase sequence of all meas- uring points. • With the binary signal >Invert Phases , you change over the phase sequence per measuring point. The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the measuring point must be swapped.
Page 864 Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover [dwphrpsys1-151013, 1, en_US] Figure 7-178 Phase Sequence Switchover Changing Over the Phase Sequence per Measuring Point A switchover of the phase sequence per measuring point can also be necessary for operational reasons. This switchover enables proper behavior of the protection equipment, for example at the transition from generator operation to motor operation (pump operation).
Page 865: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas- uring point.
Page 866: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover Phase C changed over with phase B NOTE If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following: The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.
Page 867: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.23 Phase-Sequence Switchover Information List 7.23.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal _:501 General:>Invert Phases General _:319 General:Phase sequence ABC _:320 General:Phase sequence ACB _:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range _:322 General:f sys _:323 General:f track General _:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted...
Page 868: Instantaneous Tripping At Switch Onto Fault
Protection and Automation Functions 7.24 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 7.24 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault Overview of Functions 7.24.1 The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto a fault. The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the pickup (measurement).
Page 869: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.24 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault Stage Description 7.24.3 Logic of the Stage [logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 7-182 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault Connection of the Stage The stage is intended to initiate instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault. To do this, the stage must be connected to one or more pickups from protection functions or protection stages, for example, to pickup of an overcurrent-protection stage.
Page 870: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.24 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected: • Overcurrent protection (phase and ground) A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the protec- tion application, which itself trips with a delay.
Page 871: Negative-Sequence Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection Overview of Functions 7.25.1 The function Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46): • Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity compared to the classical overcurrent protection •...
Page 872: Stage Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection Stage Description 7.25.3 Logic of a Stage [logiknsp-070312-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-184 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve Method of Measurement The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative- sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated.
Page 873: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection Application and Setting Notes 7.25.4 Parameter: Threshold • Recommended setting value (_:1981:3) Threshold = 10 % The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is a practicable value for fault indications of electrical machines.
Page 874: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:1981:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s delay _:1981:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s delay Definite-T 2 • _:1982:1 Definite-T 2:Mode •...
Page 875: Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection Description 7.25.7 Logic of a Stage [lo_NSP_Inverse, 1, en_US] Figure 7-185 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve Method of Measurement The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative- sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated.
Page 876: Application And Settings Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value. The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data. Blocking of the Stage When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Page 877: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.25 Negative-Sequence Protection With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes. Settings 7.25.9 Addr.
Page 878: Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Overview of Functions 7.26.1 The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to: • Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against thermal overloads •...
Page 879: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Logic [lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US] Figure 7-187 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value is calculated.
Page 880: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled. Parameter Value Description If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set parameter Enable filter = yes.
Page 881: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced 7.26.3.4 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) Filter _:301 Filter:Iph:A _:302 Filter:Iph:B _:303 Filter:Iph:C Description 7.26.4 Logic [lo_TOLP_withFilterstage, 2, en_US] Figure 7-188 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 882 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced [lo_Stage Control, 1, en_US] Figure 7-189 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control RMS-Value Selection The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement: • Normal RMS value • Gained RMS value from the function block Filter The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been enabled.
Page 883 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers to the rated current of the protected object (k = I rated, obj Rated current of the protected object rated, obj At the same time, I is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:...
Page 884 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Operate Curve If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following: [foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US] Operate time τ Time constant Measured load current Preload current preload...
Page 885 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Dropout of Tripping Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Page 886: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Application and Setting Notes 7.26.5 Parameter: Threshold current warning • Default setting (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.000 A at I = 1 A rated Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (I ).
Page 887 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material, design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of 10 % is permissible.
Page 888 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Parameter: Imax thermal • Default setting (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at I = 1 A rated The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax therm.
Page 889: Settings
No temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is connected. • The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the Default temperature. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Parameter: Minimal temperature • Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20°C If the measured ambient temperature drops below the set value, the set value is assumed as the ambient temperature.
Page 890: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 891 Protection and Automation Functions 7.26 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Information Data Class Type (Type) _:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica _:502 49 Th.overl. #:>Emergency start _:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive _:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior _:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health _:301 49 Th.overl.
Page 892: Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase Overview of Functions 7.27.1 The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to: • Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload Structure of the Function 7.27.2 The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with...
Page 893: Function Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase Function Description 7.27.3 Logic [lotolp1p-250713-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-192 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection Function Thermal Replica The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model according to the thermal differential equation with [fodiffgl-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]...
Page 894 Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase With the following standardization: [fonormie-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US] Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible current k I rated, obj Θ Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑ describes the coupled ambient temperature.
Page 895 Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal threshold has been reached. The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic compo- nents.
Page 896: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase Resetting the Thermal Map You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory. Blocking the Function Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset.
Page 897 The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from the specifications of the manufacturer! Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications. Parameter: Thermal time constant •...
Page 898 Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase [dwtime-dependent-110815-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Parameter: Imax thermal • Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal= 2.5 A for l = 1 A rated The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax therm.
Page 899 Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase [fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US] EXAMPLE: Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K From this, a temperature for I of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a measuring element for rated the measurement.
Page 900: Settings
A temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is not connected. • The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the Default temperature. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Parameter: Minimal temperature • Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20°C If the measured ambient temperature drops below the preset value, the set value will be assumed as the ambient temperature.
Page 901: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C temperature _:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on ture sensor configuration Information List 7.27.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) 49 Th.overl.
Page 902: Temperature Supervision
Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision 7.28 Temperature Supervision Overview of Functions 7.28.1 The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of: • Motors • Generators • Transformers In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation. The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
Page 903: Function Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Function Description 7.28.3 Logic [lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 7-195 Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units function group.
Page 904: Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Parameter: Sensor location • Default setting (_:11101:46) Sensor location = Other You inform the device of the sensor installation location using the Sensor location parameter. Oil, Ambient, Turn, Bearing and Other are available for selection. The selection is not evaluated in the device, it only serves an informational purpose in the medium in which the temperature measurement takes place.
Page 905 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:11101:1 Point 1:Mode • • test _:11101:40 Point 1:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C _:11101:41 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ stage 1 _:11101:42 Point 1:Threshold stage 2...
Page 906 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:11104:1 Point 4:Mode • • test _:11104:40 Point 4:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C _:11104:41 Point 4:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ stage 1 _:11104:42 Point 4:Threshold stage 2...
Page 907 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:11107:1 Point 7:Mode • • test _:11107:40 Point 7:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C _:11107:41 Point 7:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ stage 1 _:11107:42 Point 7:Threshold stage 2...
Page 908 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting • _:11110:1 Point 10:Mode • • test _:11110:40 Point 10:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C _:11110:41 Point 10:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ stage 1 _:11110:42 Point 10:Threshold stage 2...
Page 909: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Information List 7.28.6 Information Data Class Type (Type) General _:2311:53 General:Health Point 1 _:11101:81 Point 1:>Block stage _:11101:54 Point 1:Inactive _:11101:52 Point 1:Behavior _:11101:53 Point 1:Health _:11101:61 Point 1:Pickup stage 1 _:11101:62 Point 1:Operate stage 1 _:11101:63 Point 1:Pickup stage 2 _:11101:64...
Page 910 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Information Data Class Type (Type) _:11105:62 Point 5:Operate stage 1 _:11105:63 Point 5:Pickup stage 2 _:11105:64 Point 5:Operate stage 2 Point 6 _:11106:81 Point 6:>Block stage _:11106:54 Point 6:Inactive _:11106:52 Point 6:Behavior _:11106:53 Point 6:Health _:11106:61 Point 6:Pickup stage 1...
Page 911 Protection and Automation Functions 7.28 Temperature Supervision Information Data Class Type (Type) _:11110:63 Point 10:Pickup stage 2 _:11110:64 Point 10:Operate stage 2 Point 11 _:11111:81 Point 11:>Block stage _:11111:54 Point 11:Inactive _:11111:52 Point 11:Behavior _:11111:53 Point 11:Health _:11111:61 Point 11:Pickup stage 1 _:11111:62 Point 11:Operate stage 1 _:11111:63...
Page 912: Arc Protection
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection 7.29 Arc Protection Overview of Function 7.29.1 The function Arc protection: • Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way • Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping •...
Page 913: Function Description
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Function Description 7.29.3 General Logic of the Function Block [lo_fb0_arcprot, 2, en_US] Figure 7-197 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 914 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Logic of the Stage [lo_stage_arcprotection, 1, en_US] Figure 7-198 Logic Diagram of the Stage TheArc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other devices in order to detect arcs. NOTE Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system components!
Page 915: Application And Setting Notes - General Settings
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement. • Measurement of the fundamental component: This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically.
Page 916: Application And Setting Notes For The Stage
If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold light is custom visible. Siemens recommends the default setting values point sensor or line sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused light. Parameter: Threshold light •...
Page 917: Settings
If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold light parameter to a higher value. Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors. Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Page 918: Information List
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Stage 2 • _:14552:1 Stage 2:Mode • • test • _:14552:2 Stage 2:Operate & • flt.rec. blocked • _:14552:9 Stage 2:External trip • initiation current • light •...
Page 919 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Information Data Class Type (Type) _:14551:54 Stage 1:Inactive _:14551:52 Stage 1:Behavior _:14551:53 Stage 1:Health _:14551:318 Stage 1:Fault arc counter _:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected _:14551:301 Stage 1:Light detected _:14551:55 Stage 1:Pickup _:14551:57 Stage 1:Operate Stage 2 _:14552:81 Stage 2:>Block stage...
Page 920: Application Example For Arc Protection With Point Sensors In Operating Mode: Light Only
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode: 7.29.8 Light Only 7.29.8.1 Description Overview The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only. The following items are considered in the example below: •...
Page 921: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection • The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart- ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it to the protection device of the feeder.
Page 922: Application Example For Arc Protection With Point Sensors In Operating Mode: Light And Current
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only. Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages. Set the parameters of the stages as follows: •...
Page 923 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection [dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US] Figure 7-200 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light) For this example, the following is assumed: • The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light influences.
Page 924: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection NOTE This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
Page 925 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection The following items are considered in the example below: • Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear • Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed •...
Page 926: Application And Setting Notes
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection NOTE If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection module). The number of GOOSE messages is not limited.
Page 927 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection • Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no • Parameter: Channel = Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 2 The Arc protection function operates with 3 stages. Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment): Set the parameters of the stages as follows: •...
Page 928: Application And Setting Notes For Variant 2 (With Feedback To Feeder Protection Devices)
Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection • Parameter: Sensor = point sensor • Parameter: External trip initiation = no Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment supervision): • Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in Figure 7-201), a pickup indication is generated immediately.
Page 929 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection Setting Information for the Protection Device in Feeder 1 The Arc protection function operates with 4 stages. Stage 1 to 3: • Parameter: Operating mode = light only • Parameter: External trip initiation = no •...
Page 930 Protection and Automation Functions 7.29 Arc Protection The Arc protection function operates with 9 stages. Stage 1 (busbar-compartment monitoring): • Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed, an operate indication is generated immedi- ately.
Page 931: Supervision Functions
Supervision Functions Overview Resource-Consumption Supervision Supervision of the Secondary System Supervision of the Device Hardware Supervision of Device Firmware Supervision of Hardware Configuration Supervision of Communication Connections Error Responses and Corrective Measures Group Indications SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 932: Overview
Supervision Functions 8.1 Overview Overview SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi- sion: • Ensures the availability of the technology used • Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device • Protects persons and primary technical devices •...
Page 933: Resource-Consumption Supervision
Supervision Functions 8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision Resource-Consumption Supervision Load Model 8.2.1 SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you from overloading the device with an excessively large application. The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into the device.
Page 934 Supervision Functions 8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision Functional Brief Description Change in Load Area Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing • points for protection, control, and Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing measurement functions Editor) • Function groups that provide measured-value prepro- cessing for insertable functions (for example, Circuit- breaker function group) •...
Page 935: Function Points
Supervision Functions 8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision Use the general Circuit breaker function group only in the following cases: • Interaction with a protection-function group is essential. That is, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the Circuit breaker function group to be switched off.
Page 936 Supervision Functions 8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision Task Level Description Use the Event-Triggered task level preferably for logic functions that Event-Triggered need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the Fast event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Page 937 Supervision Functions 8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision NOTE The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in any other level.
Page 938: Supervision Of The Secondary System
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Supervision of the Secondary System Overview 8.3.1 The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni- tored for the correct function of the device.
Page 939: Structure Of The Function
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.2.2 Structure of the Function The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current measurement point. [dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 8-4 Structure/Embedding of the Function The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 8-5):...
Page 940: Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Logic [looppode-200812-05.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 8-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal- ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value is violated and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6).
Page 941: 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure Logic [losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure Balanced Fault – VA, VB, VC < A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously: •...
Page 942: Switching Onto A 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the current phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase. 8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load Logic...
Page 943: Application And Setting Notes
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in. Siemens recommends using the default setting. If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.
Page 944: Settings
In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas- uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task. Siemens recommends to switch that subfunction on. With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring- voltage failure is not active.
Page 945: Information List
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting _:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A 1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A...
Page 946: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [dwivsstr-060214-01.vsd, 1, en_US] Figure 8-9 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group 8.3.3.3 Function Description You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in DIGSI from the global library. It contains 1 pre-instantiated Supervision group function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a maximum of 25 supervision groups.
Page 947 Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [sc_ivsgrp, 1, en_US] NOTE Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms. You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Supervision group function block, and define any binary input within this group for the supervision of the signaling voltage.
Page 948: Application And Setting Notes
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI. 8.3.3.4 Application and Setting Notes Parameter (General): Mode • Default setting (_:1) Mode = on With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the signaling voltage for the appropriate group.
Page 949: Settings
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input • Default setting (_:109) Binary input = 1 Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108) I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Page 950: Information List
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Supervis. grp. end • _:108 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module I/O module 1 I/O module 1 • I/O module 2 • I/O module 3 • I/O module 4 • I/O module 5 •...
Page 951: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 8-10 Structure/Embedding of the Function 8.3.4.3 Function Description The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions (see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
Page 952: Voltage-Balance Supervision
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Voltage-Balance Supervision 8.3.5 8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed. The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors: • Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit •...
Page 953: Application And Setting Notes
Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75 The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (V ) and the maximum ) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 954: Settings
Parameter: Delay failure indication • Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting. 8.3.5.5 Settings Addr.
Page 955: Structure Of The Function
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.6.2 Structure of the Function The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase voltage measuring point. [dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 8-14 Structure/Embedding of the Function 8.3.6.3 Function Description The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors.
Page 956 Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Logic [lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 8-16 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The sum of the 4 voltages must be 0. Threshold If the calculated fault voltage (V ) exceeds the Threshold, the parameter Delay failure indication...
Page 957: Application And Setting Notes
Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault voltage (V ) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting. Parameter: Delay failure indication •...
Page 958: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 8-17 Structure/Embedding of the Function 8.3.7.3 Function Description Logic [lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 8-18 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa- tion.
Page 959: Application And Setting Notes
Parameter: Delay failure indication • Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting. 8.3.7.5 Settings Addr.
Page 960: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 8-19 Structure/Embedding of the Function 8.3.8.3 Function Description The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if |Imin| / |Imax| <...
Page 961: Application And Setting Notes
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Logic [locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 8-21 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (I ) and the maximum (I ) phase current.
Page 962: Settings
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Parameter: Release threshold • Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for I = 1 A or 2.5 A for I rated rated = 5 A The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (I Parameter: Delay failure indication •...
Page 963: Structure Of The Function
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System NOTE For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th current measurement input (I 8.3.9.2 Structure of the Function The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas- urement point.
Page 964 Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Logic [locssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 8-24 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision Slope of the Characteristic Curve The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
Page 965: Application And Setting Notes
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Threshold The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func- tion. Delay failure indication When the calculated fault current (I ) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (I ), the delay of the failure Fmax indication (parameter: Delay failure indication) starts.
Page 966: Information List
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s indication 8.3.9.6 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type) Supv. sum I _:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function _:54 Supv.
Page 967: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.10.3 Function Description Logic [locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US] Figure 8-26 Logic Diagram of the Current Phase-Rotation Supervision The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa- tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of the power-system data (see chapter 5.1 Power-System Data).
Page 968: Application And Setting Notes
Parameter: Delay failure indication • Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting. 8.3.10.5 Settings Addr.
Page 969: Trip-Circuit Supervision With 2 Binary Inputs
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 8.3.11.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the circuit- breaker auxiliary contact.
Page 970: Trip-Circuit Supervision With 1 Binary Input
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Command AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State Relay (CR) Closed Open Closed CR successfully activated the circuit breaker With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
Page 971 Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [dwtcs1be-110611-01.tif, 2, en_US] Figure 8-30 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input Command relay Circuit breaker (closed) CB coil Circuit-breaker coil AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed when CB is closed) AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open when CB is closed) V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
Page 972 Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System If the binary input signal >Trip relay is not routed to a binary input of the device (information routing in DIGSI 5), then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and Trip-circuit supervision is no longer in effect.
Page 973: Application And Setting Notes
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System [fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US] The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R: [fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US] 8.3.11.5 Application and Setting Notes Parameter: Alarm delay • Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs) •...
Page 974: Information List
Supervision Functions 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting 74TC sup.2BI # • 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode • • test _:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm delay 1.00 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s 8.3.11.7 Information List Information Data Class Type (Type)
Page 975: Supervision Of The Device Hardware
Supervision Functions 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware Supervision of the Device Hardware Overview 8.4.1 The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions. The following modules of the device hardware are monitored: •...
Page 976: Analog-Channel Supervision Via Fast Current-Sum
Supervision Functions 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware Device Operating Hours Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered. You can neither reset nor change the statistical value. Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum 8.4.2 8.4.2.1...
Page 977: Function Description
Supervision Functions 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware [dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 8-33 Structure/Embedding of the Function 8.4.2.3 Function Description Errors in the current circuits are detected if = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and >...
Page 978 Supervision Functions 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware Logic [losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US] Figure 8-35 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid failures (see 11.44 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum NOTE...
Page 979 Supervision Functions 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware The slope of characteristic 2 is fixed to 0.95. The base point of the slope of characteristic 2 is fixed to 10. SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017...
Page 980: Supervision Of Device Firmware
Supervision Functions 8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware Supervision of Device Firmware The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device. The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device: • Supervisions of the data and version consistency • Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware •...
Page 981: Supervision Of Hardware Configuration
Supervision Functions 8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration Supervision of Hardware Configuration The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with the hardware actually detected.
Page 982: Supervision Of Communication Connections
Supervision Functions 8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections Supervision of Communication Connections SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond the hardware supervision of the communication plug-in modules the transferred data must be monitored with respect to their consistency, failure, or outage. Supervision With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
Page 983: Error Responses And Corrective Measures
Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Error Responses and Corrective Measures Overview 8.8.1 When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state.
Page 984: Defect Severity 1
Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Error Responses Defect severity 1 Defect severity 2 During the starting time of the device Defect severity 3 Defect severity 4 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated. The device remains in operation.
Page 985 Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures [lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US] Figure 8-36 Forming of a Warning Group Indication Group Warning Overview of Errors Indication Type Group Explanation Warning General: If the Health of an individual function (_:53) Health block, for example a protection stage or (_:53) Health = Warning an individual function, goes to the (_:53) Health = Alarm...
Page 986 (_:320) Auxiliary Power Fail Check the external power supply. Battery fault: (_:305) Battery failure Replace the device battery. To avoid data losses, Siemens recom- mends replacing the device battery when the supply voltage of the device is switched on. (_:312) Compensation error x Calibration error in module x: Contact the Customer Support Center.
Page 987: Defect Severity 2
Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Indication Type Group Explanation Warning Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:superv. Failure of the current phase-rotation Phsseq.I: supervision (see chap. 8.3.10.1 Over- view of Functions (_:71) Failure Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:superv. Failure of the current sum (see chap. Sum I 8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions (_:71) Failure...
Page 988: Defect Severity 3
Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Red error LED Is activated during the restart NOTE If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode. For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
Page 989: Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Overview of Errors Number Device-Diagnosis Log 2822 Memory error (continuous) Contact the Customer Support Center. 4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12: Contact the Customer Support Center. 4729 Device bus error (repeated): •...
Page 990 Supervision Functions 8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
Page 991: Group Indications
Supervision Functions 8.9 Group Indications Group Indications The following group indications are available: • (_:300) Group alarm • (_:301) Group warning • (_:302) Group indication You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device) → Information routing. In the operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
Page 992 Supervision Functions 8.9 Group Indications The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module. Alarm Handling Group Indication Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log.
Page 993: Measured Values, Energy Values, And Supervision Of The Primary System
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System Overview of Functions Structure of the Function Operational Measured Values Fundamental and Symmetrical Components Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 1000 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 1020 Average Values 1037 Minimum/Maximum Values 1040 Energy Values 1042 9.10 User-Defined Metered Values...
Page 994: Overview Of Functions
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.1 Overview of Functions Overview of Functions The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups. Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are required for the functions of this function group.
Page 995: Structure Of The Function
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the Function Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups. A typical function group is displayed below. Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group Type In the simplest version the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group obtains the measured values of the 3- phase voltage and current system and contains the following measured-value groups:...
Page 996 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.2 Structure of the Function [dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US] Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of the protected object.
Page 997: Operational Measured Values
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.3 Operational Measured Values Operational Measured Values Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups. The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values. The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations: RMS values Active power...
Page 998 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.3 Operational Measured Values Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to dary Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1 Phase-related active power –...
Page 999: Fundamental And Symmetrical Components
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components Fundamental and Symmetrical Components The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the amount and phase angle.
Page 1000: Phasor Measurement Unit (Pmu)
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System 9.5 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) Overview of Functions 9.5.1 A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a high precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station.

This manual is also suitable for:

6md86

Siemens 6MD85 Manual

Preface

Open Source Software

1 Introduction

2 Basic Structure of the Function

3 System Functions

4 Applications

5 Function-Group Types

6 Control Functions

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Siemens 6MD85

Summary of Contents for Siemens 6MD85